JP4635028B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and derives and displays a display result, and is advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit. A special game in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to be the specific display result as compared to the normal game state after the specific game state is completed and the normal game state is completed when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a state and executes a transition condition establishment notification effect capable of notifying that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific gaming state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit gaming state), or a state in which a right to become advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, when it is determined to be in a high probability state, it is impossible to specify whether or not the identification information is shifted to the high probability state when the identification information is variably displayed. There is one that is configured to execute a notification effect for notifying that the state is shifted to the high probability state or that the state is the high probability state after the symbols are derived and displayed.

  For example, in Patent Document 1, after a transition to a specific gaming state (for example, during a big hit gaming state round), a mini game is executed based on the operation button being pressed by the player, and an item by the mini game There is disclosed a gaming machine configured to notify an expected degree of promotion (so-called completion) to a special gaming state (for example, probable big hit) according to the number.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-131142 (paragraphs 0053-0058 and FIGS. 9-11)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a player can participate in a probable promotion effect by executing a mini game. However, the expectation to be notified is only changed by pressing the operation button by the player, and it is internally determined to be in the special gaming state regardless of the operation result of the operation using the operation button by the player. It will be notified whether it is done. As a result, the player's willingness to operate the button is reduced, and the willingness to participate in the probable promotion effect is reduced. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game cannot be improved.

  Therefore, the present invention can improve the interest of the player for the notification effect that the special gaming state occurs, and can improve the player's willingness to participate in the notification effect that the special game state occurs. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that can identify each of them, and variably displaying a display result (for example, the first special symbol). A specific display state (for example, jackpot game) which is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display section. Display state of the variable display of the identification information as compared to the normal state after the specific gaming state is ended when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit) Is shifted to a special game state (for example, a probability change state) that is likely to be a specific display result, and a transition condition establishment notification effect (for example, a probability change promotion effect) that can notify that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied is executed. An image display device that performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information for presentation (for example, decorative symbols) corresponding to variable display of identification information in a variable display section as a production component (for example, an effect display part) An effect display device 9) and a pre-determining means for determining whether the display result derived and displayed on the variable display unit is a specific display result and whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied before the display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the part that executes steps S1513 and S1517 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the notification effect execution capable of executing the transition condition establishment notification effect based on the determination by the predetermining means as the specific display result. Means (for example, steps S1921 to S1933 and S1941 to S1953 in the production control microcomputer 100 are executed. And the operation means (for example, the operation button 120) that can be operated by the player, and the notification effect executing means is determined to establish a predetermined transition condition and executes the transition condition satisfaction notification effect. As a condition that a predetermined notification condition is established based on an operation by the operating means (for example, it is determined that both Y are determined in steps S1929 and S1930. Both are determined Y in steps S1949 and S1950). When it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, the portion of steps S1931 and S1951 in the production control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S1931 and S1951) and the predetermined transition condition is determined to be satisfied, the specific display result is displayed. A special table that can identify that the predetermined transition condition has been established among the variable display results of the corresponding identification information for performance. The display result is derived and displayed on the image display device to notify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, or the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result other than the special display result is displayed on the image display device. It further comprises notification method determining means for deciding whether to execute the transition condition establishment notification effect by derivation display (for example, the part for executing steps S832A to S833K in the effect control microcomputer 100). When the method determining means determines to execute the transition condition establishment notification effect, the transition condition satisfaction notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 has the probability variation promotion effect execution flag set in step S1978A). After moving to step S1978B on the basis of step S1921 1933, S1941 to S1953), the notification method determining means derives and displays the special display result on the image display device as the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result based on the operation status of the operation means. To notify that the predetermined transition condition has been established, or to display and display the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result other than the special display result on the image display device. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the table for determining the successful promotion / determination of promotion effect shown in FIG. 94A when determining Y in step S833B). Step S833E is executed, and when it is determined to be N in Step S833B, an operation failure probability variation promotion effect determination shown in FIG. 94B is determined. Performing step S833E select a table) that is characterized.

According to the first aspect of the present invention, when it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is established, it can be identified that the predetermined transition condition is established among the variable display results of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result. The special display result is derived and displayed on the image display device to notify that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, or the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result other than the special display result is displayed on the image display device. A notification method determining means for determining whether to execute the transition condition establishment notification effect by derivation display, and when the notification effect execution means determines to execute the transition condition establishment notification effect by the notification method determination means, the transition condition The establishment notification effect is executed, and the notification method determination means displays a special display as a variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result based on the operation status of the operation means. Deriving and displaying the result on the image display device notifies that the predetermined transition condition has been established, or derives the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result other than the special display result to the image display device Since it is configured to change the determination ratio of whether to display and execute the transition condition establishment notification effect, the game effect can be executed according to the characteristics of the player, and the special gaming state occurs The interest of the player can be improved.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. In the effect display device 9, variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays an effect symbol (decoration symbol) as identification information. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  In addition to the effect display device 9, the first decorative symbol display that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. And a second decorative symbol display 9b for performing variable display of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. It may be. In this case, the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b are controlled by the production control microcomputer 100, and are constituted by, for example, two LEDs or seven-segment LEDs.

  A first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8 a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided on the left side of the top of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, and is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. ing. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. A second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6. The second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer 560, and is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The special symbol display is configured as one display, and a part of the display area forms a first variable display unit that performs variable display of the first special symbol, and the other part of the display area is the first display area. You may form the 2nd variable display part which performs the variable display of 2 special symbols. In this case, for example, the special symbol display is configured as one display including four 7-segment LEDs, of which two 7-segment LEDs form the first variable display, and the other two 7-segment LEDs are A second variable display portion may be formed.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) When the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established by prioritizing the winning to the second starting winning port 14 out of the winning to the first starting winning port 13 and the winning to the second starting winning port 14. . That is, if the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and if the big hit game is not executed, even if the first reserved memory number is not 0, the second The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed until the number of reserved memories becomes zero. It should be noted that the variable display start condition may be established in the order in which the start winnings are generated regardless of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The display design (decorative design) is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Below the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed 4. There is provided a first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a composed of two indicators (for example, LEDs). The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 8b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a total reserved storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total reserved storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition. Since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 The opening time becomes longer and the number of opening times is increased. Further, in this embodiment, even in the short time state (the gaming state in which the special symbol variable display time is shortened), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened or the number of times of opening is increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27R and 27L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball LED 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28b, and a ball cut LED 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 28c. . The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25 are examples of effects light emitters provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In this embodiment, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. This operation button 120 is operated by the player during execution of the probability change promotion effect described later. When the operation button 120 is pressed by the player, the electrode is brought into an on state by contact with the microcomputer, and an on signal (detection signal) is mounted on the board (in this embodiment, on the effect control board 80). It is output to the mounted effect control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 3). In the example shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 120 is provided on the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, but may be provided at another location (for example, directly above the hitting ball operation handle 5).

  In this embodiment, when a jackpot is determined, a probability change promotion effect that notifies whether or not to be promoted to a probability change is executed, a predetermined notification condition is established, and a probability change jackpot is internally determined As a condition, it is informed that it will be promoted to probability change. In this embodiment, on the condition that a predetermined notification condition is established based on the operation performed by the operation button 120 during execution of the probability variation promotion effect, and further, it is determined that the probability variation big hit internally. You will be notified that you will be promoted to a certain change. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the probability variation promotion effect is executed based on the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the player sets the operation button 120 to satisfy a predetermined condition. A first certainty-variable promotion effect that notifies that the number of times of continuous hitting is promoted to certainty is executed. In this case, when the player repeatedly hits the operation button 120 for a predetermined number of times that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, and it is notified that the player is promoted to the probability change on condition that the probability change big hit is internally determined. Is done. Further, when the probability change promotion effect is executed based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability is changed when the player operates the operation button 120 within a predetermined operation success period. A second certain variation promotion effect that notifies the promotion is executed. In this case, when the player operates the operation button 120 within a predetermined operation success period, a predetermined notification condition is established, and the player is promoted to a probability change on condition that the probability change big hit is internally determined. Informed.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. A random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 is configured to select a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a occurs, and performs a specific display based on the random R. It is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a result, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot. When it is determined that the game is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a volatile storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the total reserved memory number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control with the effect display device 9 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103a. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a detection signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 103b. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100 and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The VDP 109 reads out necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command in accordance with the instruction of the effect control CPU 101. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data read from the character ROM in accordance with an instruction from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 8a is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port 13 is detected by the first starting port switch 13a. After the start condition is satisfied, the process is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. The variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is performed after the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 14 is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. For example, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state being ended.

  In the special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, a fixed special that results in a variable symbol variable display result is obtained. The symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1” and “7” are big hit symbols, numbers indicating “5” are small hit symbols, and a symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. It is said. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol in the variable display of both special symbols may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1” and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is the 15-round jackpot symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “1” is displayed. The symbol is a 2 round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 However, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is executed that changes to a first state advantageous to the player. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby playing the special variable prize winning ball device 20 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and end one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in a 15-round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the jackpot gaming state (two round jackpot state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round Is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) that is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate). It becomes. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 20 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” which is the 15-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, either the normal big hit or the probable variable big hit is displayed. It will be a big hit. The special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a 15-round jackpot symbol, is a regular jackpot based on the fact that the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol display. After the 15-round jackpot state ends, the normal state As compared with the case, the special symbol change time in the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol change time) is controlled to be a short time state. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a short-time state, a probability variation state described later, and a small hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system) As in the case where the reset is performed, the same control as in the case where the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. In this embodiment, after the big hit game with the normal big hit, the short time state is that the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit”. The process ends when any of the conditions is satisfied first.

  A special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a 15-round jackpot symbol, is displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol. After the 2 round jackpot state is over based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that is a big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, for example, the special symbol changes compared to the normal state While the time is shortened, control is performed to a probability variation state (high probability gaming state) in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed. In this probability change state, in the variable display of each special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result becomes “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is improved to be higher than the normal state. . In this embodiment, after the probability variation state is changed to the probability variation state, a predetermined number of (for example, 100 times) special symbol variable display is executed, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The process ends when either condition is satisfied first. Note that the probability variation state may continue until the next variable display result is “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the variable symbol variable display. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability change state at a predetermined rate when the variable symbol special display starts. May be terminated.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening for the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 20 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probability variation state and the short time state, the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display unit 10 can be controlled so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, or the normal symbol can be variably displayed each time. Control for improving the probability that the normal symbol variable display result is “per normal symbol” than in the normal state, and the movable blade piece in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal symbol”. The second start condition is increased by increasing the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 such as control for making the tilt time of the game longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared with that in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is facilitated by the fact that the above is easily established. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the normal state other than the probability variation state and the short time state, the first start winning port 13 is easier to start than the second start winning port 14, but the probability variation state or In the short-time state, the second start winning opening 14 is easier to start than the first starting winning opening 13. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, variable display of decorative symbols The state may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed ("reach variation symbol") when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas (for example, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas) constitutes a predetermined jackpot combination. Decorative symbols are displayed in the remaining decorative symbol display areas (for example, the “decorative” decorative symbol display area, etc.) that are not yet stopped when decorative symbols (for example, decorative symbols indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) are stopped. The display state is changing, or all or part of the “left”, “middle”, or “right” decorative symbol display area is synchronized with the decorative symbol forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Is in the display state. In response to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such changes in the character image display, the background image display mode, and the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, “development opportunity”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the specific effect of “slip”, two or more decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “left”) are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area The decorative symbol to be stopped is changed by changing the decorative symbol again after changing the decorative symbol again (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area and the “right” decorative symbol display area). An effect display is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation change display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the stopped decorative display has been confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific production, “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” decorations based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition for variable symbol display is established once. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the symbol display areas, temporarily display the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas, and then change the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas again (pseudo-continuous variation). ) Can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, any of the pseudo ream chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 4A is configured in the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The decorative symbol to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific production of “Intro”, after changing the decorative pattern in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the fixed decorative symbol is stopped in all the decorative symbol display areas. Before the display (final stop display), for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, and then predetermined in all the decorative symbol display areas. After the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. As an example, in the specific effect of “Development Chance”, one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 4B is configured in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. The decorative symbol to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “Development Opportunity End”, the decoration pattern is changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas, and then developed in all the decoration symbol display areas. An effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as a chance is stopped and displayed as a final decorative pattern (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable.

  In the “character display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, and then two or more decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left”) are displayed. Effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 9 is performed before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area and the like.

  In the notice effect of “Step-up image”, the decoration pattern is changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas, and then decorated in two or more decoration symbol display areas. Before the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the effect display device 9 may be performed. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the “mail display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in two or more decorative symbol display areas. Before the temporary stop display, an effect display that changes the effect operation is performed, for example, the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player. Is called.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol display, the variable symbol display will not change to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases where a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination or a fixed decorative graphic that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 of the special combination is displayed in a stopped manner. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the variable symbol display state has reached the reach state after the variable symbol variable display has started. Corresponding to the above, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a 15-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a normal jackpot as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state. Correspondingly, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a combination that recalls a predetermined normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the confirmed decorative pattern that is a combination reminiscent of a big hit is, for example, a symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”is“ left ”,“ middle ”,“ right ” As long as it can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each decorative symbol display area. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). In this embodiment, there are two normal big hits, a first normal big hit and a second normal big hit. In the case of the first normal big hit, only the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9, and the probability variation promotion effect described later is not executed. In the case of the second normal big hit, after the non-probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9, the probable change promotion effect is executed in the big hit game effect.

  In this embodiment, a decorative symbol is displayed on one line in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas on the effect display device 9 as a predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where one effective line is displayed on the effect display device 9, and a plurality of effective lines (for example, five lines) may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, there are three probability variation big hits: first probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, and third probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the 15-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the first probability change, The decorative display is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in any one of the three display modes of probability variation and third probability variation. Note that the display mode of the first probability variation is to execute the reach effect (for example, normal reach) similar to the case of “normal” during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or without executing the reach effect. It is a display mode that displays a fixed decorative symbol that is a combination that recalls a probable big hit as a stop symbol with a high probability of stopping (a low probability, a fixed decorative symbol that is a combination that usually recalls a big jackpot (non-probable variable symbol) is stopped and displayed. ) Further, the display mode of the second probability variation is to execute a reach effect (for example, super reach) different from the case of “normal” during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and to recall the probability variable big hit as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. This is a display mode in which the fixed decorative symbols to be combined are stopped and displayed with high probability. In addition, the display mode of the third probability variation is a probability variation big hit with a reach effect (for example, a normal reach) similar to the case of “normal” during variable display of a decorative design, or without performing a reach effect. In spite of being, there is a display mode in which a definite decorative symbol (non-probable variable symbol) that is a combination that normally recalls a big hit is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol. In addition, when the third probability variation jackpot is reached, after the non-probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9, the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game effect.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is a 15-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the first special variable big hit as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. Correspondingly, a combination that recalls a certain probability variation jackpot after a reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed. There is a case where a fixed decorative pattern that becomes is stopped and displayed with a high probability. Here, for example, a confirmed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination reminiscent of a promising big hit is a symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is a 15-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the second special variable big hit as the confirmed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. Correspondingly, after a reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, there is a high probability that a definite decorative symbol (probable variation symbol) that becomes a big hit combination reminiscent of a predetermined probability variation big hit Is stopped and displayed.

  When the special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a 15-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the third special variable big hit as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display state is the reach state. Correspondingly, after a reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the jackpot combination that normally recalls the big hit The fixed decorative symbol (non-probable variable symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  When the special symbol indicating the number of “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state, and is predetermined. The fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 4B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. In some cases, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in C) is stopped and displayed. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. Corresponding to the above, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative pattern that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display becomes a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative symbols in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed are variable. The display mode is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the same as when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “accurate”. After the decorative display is variably displayed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, or the fixed decorative pattern that is one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. A symbol may be displayed in a stopped state, or a finalized decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach combination may be displayed in a stopped state. In this way, in response to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “5”, which is a small hit symbol, variable display of decorative symbols in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The mode is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 4 (C) is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “accurate”, and the variable display mode is “small”. When it is “winning”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In other words, when the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “probable”. Determine. In addition, you may be made to use in common the sudden chance big hit and the small hit case in the case of sudden probability change big hit TC1-TC4 shown in FIG.4 (C). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult to understand whether the game is suddenly a big hit or a small hit (that is, whether or not the game state is shifted to the probability change state).

  In addition, after the variable display result becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” continues. If it is determined that the probability change state or the short-time state is to be ended in response to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the control is returned to the normal state after the end of the small hit gaming state. You may make it carry out, and you may make it control to a normal state at the time of completion | finish of the fluctuation display used as a small hit.

  Next, control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the effect display device 9, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 27L and 27R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, a command 8001 (H) is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Command 8002 (H) is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Command 81XX (H) corresponds to a variable pattern of a special symbol, such as a decorative pattern variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the effect display device 9. This is a change pattern specification command to be specified. Here, XX (H) indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXX (H) is a display result command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the display result command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), a prior determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. To the big hit type determination result as to whether the decorative display variable display mode is “first normal”, “second normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. Correspondingly, different EXT data is set.

  Specifically, the command 8C00 (H) is a first display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01 (H) is a second display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “first normal big hit”. The command 8C02 (H) is a third display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “second normal big hit”. The third display result command is a command that specifies the second normal jackpot and also specifies the execution of the probable change promotion effect. The command 8C03 (H) is a fourth display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “first positive variation big hit”. The command 8C04 (H) is a fifth display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “second probability variation big hit”. Command 8C05 (H) is a sixth display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “third probability variation big hit”. Note that the sixth display result command is a command that specifies the third probability variation jackpot and also specifies the execution of the probability variation promotion effect. The command 8C06 (H) indicates a determination result that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”, that is, the seventh display for designating that the sudden probability change big hit Result command. Command 8C07 (H) is an eighth display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00 (H) is a decorative symbol stop designation command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, there is a case where the decorative symbol variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and a case where the decorative symbol variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. A common decorative design stop designation command is used.

  Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) transmitted when the gaming state is the normal state, and command 9501 (H) is transmitted when the gaming state is the high probability state. Effect control command (high probability state background designation command). Hereinafter, the effect control commands of commands 9500 (H) and 9501 (H) are referred to as background designation commands. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the type (for example, color) of the background to be displayed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the received background designation command. In this embodiment, the normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H)) is transmitted even when the gaming state is controlled to the short time state without the high probability state.

  A0XX (H) is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the display result command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the display result command, the EXT data depends on whether the type of big hit is the first normal big hit, the second normal big hit, or the first certain variation big hit to the third certain variation big hit. However, the same data (for example, “01”) may be set as the EXT data in the hit start designation command regardless of the type of jackpot. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the 15th round big hit that designates the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize winning opening is open in each round corresponding to the 15th round big hit state. It is. Command A2XX (H) displays an effect image (for example, an effect image in the interval between rounds) during the period when the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the 15 round big hit that is designated after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  Command A3XX (H) is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the display result command or the hit start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result command or the hit start designation command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the display result command, the EXT data depends on whether the type of big hit is the first normal big hit, the second normal big hit, or the first certain variation big hit to the third certain variation big hit. However, regardless of the type of jackpot, the same data (for example, “01”) may be set as the EXT data in the hit end designation command. Good.

  Command A4XX (H) is a two-round big hit state based on the variable display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “surprise”, or a small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit” In response to the above, a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the accuracy / small hit is designated to designate display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize opening is in an open state in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XX (H) specifies display of effect images during the period when the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state This is a command to be used after opening the big prize opening for accuracy and small hits. In the command for opening the big winning opening for the accuracy / small hit and the command specifying after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of the variable winning action in the round or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  In this embodiment, even when the variable display result is “small hit”, a case where a special winning opening opening designation command, a special winning opening open designation command, and a winning end designation command are transmitted is shown. When the variable display result is “small winning”, the special winning opening open designation command, the special winning opening open designation command, and the winning end designation command may not be transmitted.

  Command B001 (H) is based on the fact that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, and the first start condition for executing variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is established. This is the first start opening prize designation command for notifying that. Command B002 (H) is based on the fact that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14, and the second start condition for executing variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is established. This is the second start opening prize designation command for notifying that.

  The command C0XX (H) is used to display the total reserved memory number and the second reserved memory so that the total reserved memory number can be specified on the total reserved memory display unit 18c provided in the display area of the effect display device 9. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value with the number. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the pending storage count notification command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the value (for example, “1” to “8”) of a total pending storage count counter described later. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 80, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, and the total reserved memory number Can be specified.

  Next, each random number used in the game control process in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. On the main board 31, for example, a random number circuit 503 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the main board 31 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining a reach 2. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4.

  Note that the CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503 to update various numerical data by software, thereby indicating numerical values indicating a part of the random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. Data may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 56 by the random number circuit 503 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software by the CPU 56 using a random counter. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol variable display is controlled as the big hit gaming state by setting the variable display result as the big hit, and the variable display result is set as the “small hit”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “65535”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the random display value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “first normal”, “second normal”, “first probability change” to “variable display mode”. This is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types of jackpot types as specific variable display types such as “third probability variation” and “surprise accuracy”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. A value in the range of “1” to “239” is taken.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR3 is in a range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “251” is used. Take.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is classified into the reach variation pattern type (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in the reach state, or reach. This is a random value for categorizing whether or not the variation pattern type has a specific effect (for example, “slip” effect) when not in the state. Then, after classification, which random pattern MR4 is used to determine which variation pattern in the classified variation pattern type (for example, the variation pattern including which super reach A among the variation pattern types of the classified super reach A) Is determined).

  FIG. 7 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 5. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-8, super PA5-1 to super PA5-4, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PC4-1 and super PC4-2, super PD1 -1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3 Variation patterns of -1 to special PG3-3 are prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 9B. ing. The first special symbol display result determination table 130A displays the variable display result as “big hit” before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as "", and whether to control to the small hit gaming state as the "small hit" as the variable display result based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referred to. The first special figure display result determination table 130 is a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether a probability change flag, which will be described later, is OFF or ON (whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state). Are set data (determination data) and the like associated (assigned) with big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, and loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B displays the variable display result as “big hit” before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. ”Is a table that is referred to for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B decides to assign the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. Data.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9, the second special figure display result determination table 130B includes only the big hit determination value data and the loss determination value data. Judgment value data may be included. Then, using the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable special display result of the second special symbol as “big hit”, and variable display of the second special symbol It may be determined whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with the result as “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type determination table 131 sets the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol as “first normal” based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type. , “Second normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “sudden probability”, and a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types of jackpot types. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the value of a special symbol pointer (special symbol pointer value) to be described later is 1 or 2 (whether it is a jackpot corresponding to variable display of the first special symbol, or the second special symbol Depending on whether or not it is a big hit corresponding to variable display), the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is changed to “first normal”, “second normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, It is composed of data for determination assigned to the jackpot type of “Accuracy”. Also, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the value of the jackpot type buffer (the jackpot type buffer value), which will be described later, from “00” to “ Table data (setting data) for setting to any of “05” may be included.

  In this embodiment, in the setting of the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, depending on whether the special symbol pointer value is 1 or 2, the random value for determining the jackpot type for the jackpot type of “surprise” The assignment of MR2-1 is different. That is, when the special symbol pointer value is 1, the value in the range of “83” to “100” among the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise” When the special symbol pointer value is 2, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, when the first start condition for starting variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a is satisfied, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The jackpot type is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied, and the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The ratio determined to be “accurate” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 11 (A) to 11 (F) and FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. The selection table is selected according to the determination result of the jackpot type. In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I, the determination result of the big hit type includes “normal” (both first normal and second normal. Hereinafter, in the case of simply “normal”, the first normal and the first normal 2 indicates both the normal and the first random change MR3, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type according to whether it is “probability” or “third probability change”, normal CA3-1, super Variations of CA3-2 to Super CA3-8, Super CB3-1 to Super CB3-5, Special CA4-1, Special CA4-2, Special CB4-1, Special CB4-2, Special CC4-1, Special CC4-2 It consists of decision data to be assigned to one of the pattern types.

  As an example, if attention is paid to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. 11A used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. In the type determination table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation”, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, whereas in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. Thus, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I used when the big hit type is “probable”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the jackpot type is other than “surprise”, such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 11 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132E for jackpot shown in FIG. 11 (E) used when the gaming state is a probable variation state, the variation patterns of the normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. In this way, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined as one of “first normal”, “second normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprising probability”, the pachinko gaming machine Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”) selected, and jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (“first” Selected at the time of “probable change”), variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132G for big hits (selected when “second probability change”), variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, 132I for big hits (selected when “surprise”) ) Are compared with each other, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, etc. Have different assignment of random numbers MR3 for determination pattern type, also may be assigned the variation pattern type determination random number value for MR3 for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Is selected as a usage table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is used for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 assigned the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 13B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 13C, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132I for use. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 11D, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, and the reach determination random number MR2- 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C are used to determine reach determination random numbers MR2-2 as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to either a determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 or a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Furthermore, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than the number of random values assigned to non-reach HA1-1 and non-reach HA1-2. A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to each of the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With this setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing reach occurrence probabilities when it is decided not to make a big hit or a small hit. In this embodiment, using the reach determination tables 134A, 134B, and 134C shown in FIG. 14, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect with the probability shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 3.8% if the total reserved memory number is 3 or more, If the total number of reserved memories is 2, it is determined to execute the reach effect with a probability of 7.9%, and if the total number of reserved memories is 1, it is determined to execute the reach effect with a probability of 9.2%, If the total number of reserved memories is 0, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 14.6%. Regardless of the total number of reserved memories, if the gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 1.7%. If the gaming state is the short-time state, a probability of 3.3% It is decided to execute the reach production.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memories (that is, the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is large, The frequency of performing the reach effect during the variable display is reduced. For this reason, the operating rate of the variable display can be improved, and the processing load on the game control means (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560) is reduced. In addition, even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, the frequency of executing the reach effect may be reduced when the total number of reserved memories is large. Further, depending on the gaming state, the frequency of executing the reach effect may be increased when the total number of reserved memories is large. By doing so, it is possible to prolong the effect by the variable display and to improve the interest in the game.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each reach variation pattern type determination table 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type determination table for reach 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C indicates whether the determination result indicating the reach state is one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, and the reach HC2-1. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, “1” to “1” in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. Further, according to the determination result of reach HA2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that the reach determination random number MR2-2 corresponds to the case where the total number of pending storage is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA 2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” or “2”. The determination result of reach HA2-3 indicates that the total pending storage number is either “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 18, 19A, and 19B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to super CB 3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is used. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes the loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the change pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the change pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for variation pattern determination. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative symbol variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to a case where the random display value MR4 for variation pattern determination corresponds to the variation pattern type when the decorative pattern variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 20, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, in response to the variation pattern type of non-reach CB1-3, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” of the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is “end of development opportunity eye” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “lost” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and execute an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1- of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the variation pattern type determination table 136A for non-reach shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, for the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, the reach determination disturbance corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total number of reserved memories corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA 1-5, “1” in the reach determination random number MR <b> 2-2 for the reach determination corresponding to the total reserved storage number “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134 </ b> A. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure variation time in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect of “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the total number is “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 21, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is normal CA2-1. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, for example, the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, such as the variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, and Super PB 3-4, is a decorative pattern after the pseudo-variable variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation variation pattern determination table 138B. Random number MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is set in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1 and super CA2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. In addition, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. 16A and 16C. ing. For the variation pattern type of super CB2-1, a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. In addition, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  Next, each random number used in the effect control process in the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. On the effect control board 80, for example, a random number circuit (not shown) or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. FIG. 22 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop at the time of slipping / development chance Random value SR3 for determining symbols, Random value SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, Random values SR6-1 to SR6 for determining first to third specific effect patterns −3, the numerical data indicating the random number value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type and the random number values SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit mounted on the effect control board 80 includes these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3. Any numerical value data may be used as long as the numerical data indicating all or a part of the number is counted. The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 may be counted. . When the effect control board 80 is not equipped with a random number circuit, the effect control CPU 101 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR6. Numerical data indicating all of −1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 may be counted.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the effect display device 9 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each “right” decorative symbol display area. Here, the final stop symbols are three decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas when the variable symbol display ends. That is. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance is “left”, “medium”, when executing the specific effect of “slip” or when executing the specific effect of “developed chance”, This is a random value used to determine the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” decorative symbol display area, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random values SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns are specified corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo-continuous”, and “intro”. It is a random value used to determine the effect pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and a value in the range of “1” to “150” is used. Take. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern in the case of executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice pattern types when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “character display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The ROM 112 mounted on the effect control board 80 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 112 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (A) to 23 (D), a table for determining a predetermined non-reach combination or a definite decorative symbol that is one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8. Final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 23A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23 (B) is a right final symbol that is a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” ornament symbol display area among the fixed ornament symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C is a medium final stop that becomes a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area among the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. This is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol, and the like.

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes a left / right turn determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C has a third random number SR1- 3 is made up of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B, the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is the same as the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an allocation, when a finalized symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized symbol is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 4A, the portion that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 4 (C), random number values SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are displayed in the portions that become the odd chances TC1 to TC4, and in the portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance symbol TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 23D is the final stop symbol display area in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas when the “development chance end” specific effect is executed. Based on the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that become the stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 is determined as one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, for example, as tables for determining a final decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. Yes. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 26 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2- that is a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area, are determined based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a decorative symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination to be assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 26 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area among the finalized decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols start to change in the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle” is started. When displaying a fixed decorative pattern that will result in variable display of decorative symbols in, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas other than the “medium” decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to stop in the “medium” decorative symbol display area. The difference (design difference) between the displayed middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, the final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to a symbol difference “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, depending on the case of any one of the variation patterns of 5 to super PA3-8. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “+2”.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 is a final stop symbol shown in, for example, FIGS. Determination tables 163A to 163D are included. The first final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as a non-probable variable symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the case of a normal big hit. This table is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The first final stop symbol determination table 163A has the symbols of the even number symbols in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It consists of decision data assigned to the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”.

  In addition, the second final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 27 (B) has the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas as non-probable variation symbols when the third probability variation big hit. A table that is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are stopped and displayed based on the random value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. is there. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. As shown in FIG. 27B, at the time of the third probability variation big hit when the probability variation promotion effect is executed, a non-probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, in this embodiment, the symbols “4”, “6”, and “8” are stopped at the time of the third likelihood big hit compared to the normal big hit. The ratio determined as the symbol is higher than the ratio at which the symbol “2” is determined as the stop symbol. Therefore, even when the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “4”, “6”, and “8” are stopped and displayed, “2” is stopped and displayed. It is possible to raise a sense of expectation for certainty than the case. Further, in this embodiment, the ratio at which the symbol “8” is determined as the stop symbol is determined at the time of the third likelihood big hit as compared to the normal big hit, and the symbols “4” and “6” are determined as the stop symbols. Higher than Accordingly, even when the non-probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “8” is stopped and displayed, “4” and “6” are more probable than when the symbol is stopped and displayed. You can increase your expectation.

  The third final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 27C shows “left”, “middle”, “right” as the non-probability variable symbol or the probability variable symbol when the first probability variable big hit or the second probability variable big hit. In order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas, based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to. The third final stop symbol determination table 163C is a symbol of an even number symbol in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. It consists of decision data to be assigned to numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” or odd symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”. ing.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 27C, in the third final stop symbol determination table 163C, the determination value assigned to the odd symbol that is the probability variation symbol is more than the determination value that is allocated to the even symbol that is the non-probability symbol. However, the decision value is also assigned to the even number of symbols at a small rate. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in the case of the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit, a non-probability variation symbol may be derived and displayed as a stop symbol of a decorative symbol at a low rate. By doing so, even if a non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be a probable big hit and improve the interest in the game. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27C, in the third final stop symbol determination table 163C, the proportion of symbols “4”, “6”, and “8” determined as stop symbols out of the non-probable variation symbols, The symbol “2” is higher than the ratio determined as the stop symbol. Therefore, even when the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “4”, “6”, and “8” are stopped and displayed, “2” is stopped and displayed. It is possible to raise a sense of expectation for certainty than the case. In addition, among the non-probable symbols, the ratio at which the symbol “8” is determined as the stop symbol is higher than the ratio at which the symbols “4” and “6” are determined as the stop symbol. Accordingly, even when the non-probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “8” is stopped and displayed, “4” and “6” are more probable than when the symbol is stopped and displayed. You can increase your expectation.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 27D is a left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-2, FZ4- in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. 3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that is 3 to be one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C shown in FIGS. 28A to 28C as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. It is. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A shows that the specific effect pattern is slipped TP1 based on the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern when the “slip” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special A random value SR6- for determining the first specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a change pattern of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. 1 is composed of data for determination assigned to specific production patterns of slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4. .

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” ornaments are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, the decorative symbol display area in the “right” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area by stopping the display after changing the decorative symbol at high speed again. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative design at, display the stop in the decorative design display area of “Left” by stopping the display after changing the decorative design at high speed in the “Left” decorative design display area. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative design at, display the stop in the decorative design display area on the "right" by stopping the display again after changing the decorative design to low speed in the "right" decorative design display area. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbol at, display the stop in the decorative symbol display area of the “left” by displaying the stop symbol after changing the decorative symbol to low speed again in the “left” decorative symbol display area. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be performed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 28B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the second specific effect pattern determination random number SR6-2 when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super A random value SR6 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, such as a change pattern of PF1-1 and special PG1-3. -2 is made up of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP 2-1, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols, and then re-variable (pseudo-variable). The all-revariable display operation to be performed is performed once until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by determining the specific effect pattern to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 using the specific effect pattern determination table 164B, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is determined. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28C indicates the specific effect pattern in the intro TP3 based on the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is converted into intro TP3. It is comprised from the data for a determination etc. which are assigned to the specific production | generation pattern of -1-intro TP3-3.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, depending on whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. The assignment of the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 corresponding to the types of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to 1 when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be the intro TP3-1, and is set to 2 when it is determined to be the intro TP3-2. If 3 is determined, it is set to 3. When the previous effect buffer value is 1, the intro TP3-1 is not assigned the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern, and when the previous effect buffer value is 2, the intro When the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to TP3-2 and the previous effect buffer value is 3, for determining the third specific effect pattern for intro TP3-3. No random number SR6-3 is assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 is a temporary table shown in, for example, FIGS. 29A to 29D as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the usage table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the usage table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development opportunity temporary change according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped symbols. In other words, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has a decorative symbol which becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has a symbol number of a decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In response to “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shows the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D displays the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4. Contains decision data to allocate.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, as shown in FIG. 30A to FIG. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D shown are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variation display operations executed until it is performed. Here, for example, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Becomes “1” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous variation) that is stopped and displayed, and becomes “2” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed two times before. By the time the pseudo continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped is executed, the variation of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the number of remaining times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area, is temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area, are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. When the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. The left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area. 2. It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1. -1 or special PG1-3, when the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is "2" In addition, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and the right temporary stop symbol, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area. KZ3-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that becomes the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations performed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the “left” ornament Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area, right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area, "middle" Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 30B are left final stop symbols as final stop symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area, respectively. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols, the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2-. 3 is composed of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of three. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 30C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is converted into the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 30D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, the pseudo continuous symbol TP2-1 to the pseudo continuous symbol TP2-3 by the specific effect pattern. Depending on the number of executions of the variation, any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 may be used as the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Can be determined.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 32 as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. 168 is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 indicates the chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol is composed of data for determination assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. Yes.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type. In the notice pattern type determination table 170, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. , Non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5 -3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, depending on the case of a variation pattern other than these variation patterns, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is It is composed of data for determination assigned to the notice pattern types of no notice or CY1 to CY3.

  Here, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, Corresponding to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as super PB 4-3 and super PB 5-3, a random value SR7 for determining a notice pattern type is set. All are assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “Intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of “Intro”, after the decorative pattern change is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas, the effect display in the specific effect is performed within a short time. When a notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, when a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, a random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned so that there is no notice at all times. The notice effect in which the specific effect and the execution period overlap can be prevented from being executed.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, notification pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 as tables for determining any of a plurality of types of notification patterns. When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, the notice pattern determination table 171A indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP1-1 to notice YP1 based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171A determines the random number value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern according to the variation pattern, for example, without the notice or assigning to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” notice effect, a character image corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, the notice pattern determination table 171B indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171B is composed of determination data assigned to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 without the notice or the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern according to the variation pattern. Has been.

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, the notice pattern determination table 171C has no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP3-1 to notice YP3 based on the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern. -3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171C determines the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern according to the variation pattern, for example, the decision data to be assigned to the notice pattern without notice or the notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the user to operate the operation button 120 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then the notice YP 3-1 to the notice in response to the operation button 120 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3, if the operation button 120 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 120 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 36, the random value SR8-3 for judging the third notice pattern corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Of these, values in the range of “1” to “170” are assigned without notice. On the other hand, the random number SR8-3 having a smaller number than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state is not notified. Assigned to. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In the other variation patterns that reach the reach state, the random display value SR8− for determining the third notice pattern depends on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). The assignment of 3 is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without notice. In other words, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared to the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is the reach state. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. Higher reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is higher, while the proportion of the decorative display variable display mode is a reachable variation pattern. The ratio of executing a high-priority notice effect is low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 37A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 37B, and various effect control pattern tables shown in FIG. 182 and the like are included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started until when the final ornament symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, effect display operations for reach effects, and effect display operations for specific effects as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effects according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 37 (B), data indicating the control contents of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of the notice pattern. However, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations corresponding to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of data, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notices CYP1-1 to CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. . Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 displays the character image MC101 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4 displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-4.

  Also, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to each of the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. . The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect Exit. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. After switching to the effect image, the notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. -2 notice effect control pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 displays an effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 38, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. The contents of the various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, data CRD1-1 to CRD1-17 of effect control patterns corresponding to each round are prepared as effect control patterns during hit control. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, since the probability variation promotion effect may be executed in the 15th round during the big hit, as shown in FIG. Production control pattern data CRD1-15 when the promotion effect is not performed, and production control pattern data CRD1-16 when the first certain change promotion effect is performed based on the variable display result of the first special symbol being a big hit And data CRD1-17 of the effect control pattern in the case of performing the second certain variation promotion effect based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a big hit. The first probability variation promotion effect and the second probability variation promotion effect will be described later.

  The RAM 113 mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 39, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 39 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, etc. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 40 and 41 show main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S5). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as the + 5V power source gradually reaches the specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S5, that is, the high power By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms again whether the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (step S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). The CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the clear signal is off, a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set, and then the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the OFF state, after a predetermined delay time, the clear signal state may be reconfirmed. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is merely an example. For example, in the power supply stop process, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area. In step S8, the flag is set. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checked is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed at the time of power-on that is not the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is performed. Execute.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and issues a power failure recovery designation command for designating notification of power failure recovery in accordance with the contents. Processing to transmit to the sub board (effect control board) is executed (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Control states such as a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out-of-ball flag, etc. An initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing according to the above. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes random number circuit confirmation processing for confirming the state of the random number circuit built in the game control microcomputer 560 (step S95). In the random number circuit confirmation process, when the random number circuit is built in the gaming machine 1, the CPU 56 sets the random number circuit (for example, starts the operation of the random number circuit). Further, the CPU 56 monitors a random number confirmation signal output from the random number circuit for a predetermined time. The random number confirmation signal is ON when the clock signal generation circuit built in the random number circuit normally outputs the internal clock signal, and otherwise (for example, when the level of the internal clock signal decreases) Will be off). If the CPU 56 detects the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the random number circuit built in the game control microcomputer 560 and notifies the random circuit error of the main board 31. A process of transmitting a main board error designation command for designating to the sub board is executed. If the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal is not detected continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that the random number circuit is operating normally, and proceeds to step S15 as it is.

  Note that the random number circuit 503 that generates the hardware random number may be built in the gaming machine 1 or may be externally provided in the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the random number circuit 503 is built in one chip (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560) together with the ROM 54 and the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( Step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display symbol random number update process (step S17) and the initial value determination random number update process (step S18). When the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state (step S16), and when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are completed. The interrupt is permitted (step S19).

  The display symbol random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol indicator 8. In this embodiment, a random number value MR2-2 for reach determination, a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination, and the like are used as display design random numbers. In this embodiment, these random number values can be updated at random by, for example, using a refresh register to vary the update target and the addition value at the time of update. By doing so, the variation pattern used for the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined more randomly, and the interest in the game can be improved. The display symbol random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display symbol random number.

  The initial value determining random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number. The initial value determining random number is the initial value of a count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a normal symbol determining random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol. It is a random number for determining the value. Further, for example, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR2-2 for determining a reach, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determining When there is a random number to be updated by software among the random number value MR4 for use, the random number for determining the initial value of the counter value for generating the random number is also the initial value determining random number. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the interrupt is disabled. The display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are described later. This is to avoid contention with the process in the timer interrupt process because the process is also executed (that is, the same process is also executed in steps S25 and S26 of the timer interrupt process). That is, if a timer interrupt occurs during the processing of steps S17 and S18, and the counter value for generating the display symbol random number and the initial value determining random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processes of steps S17 and S18.

  As described above, a game store clerk or the like can easily perform initialization processing by starting the power supply to the gaming machine (for example, turning on the power switch) while the clear switch is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-off signal is turned on) (step S20). Next, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the switch circuit 58. Then, the state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs display control processing for outputting and clearing the DG signal to various displays such as the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator. Execute (Step S22). Next, the CPU 56 executes an abnormal winning notification process for notifying that an abnormal winning to the special winning opening has been detected (step S23). Specifically, the count switch 23 is turned on in spite of the fact that it is before opening the grand prize opening in the special symbol process process described later (specifically, in the process of steps S300 to S303 described later). Is detected, it is determined that an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has been detected, and control is performed to notify.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number used for game control is performed (random number update process: step S24). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number (initial value determining random number updating process: step S25). Furthermore, CPU56 performs the process which updates the count value of the counter for producing | generating a display symbol random number (display symbol random number update process: step S26).

  When the random number update process, the initial value determination random number update process, and the display symbol random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command by setting an effect control command related to a decorative symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (effect symbol command control process). : Step S29). Note that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and the like (step S31). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. . The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  In addition, the CPU 56 executes a test terminal process that is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S32). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (Step S33: Output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S34).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag. A symbol display control process is performed (step S35). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag is set in the special symbol process, the CPU 56 outputs the output every 0.2 seconds. The display control data value set in the buffer is incremented by one. Instead of using the start flag and the end flag, the CPU 56 may update the value of the display control data based on the value of the special symbol process flag. For example, when the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (1 in this embodiment), the CPU 56 sets the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the value of the display control data may be incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds until 3). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Then, when the end flag is set or the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 displays the stop symbol of the special symbol determined in the special symbol process process as the first special symbol display. Is displayed on the display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S36).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S37). In this case, when the gaming state is a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 1 indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. Further, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 2 indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer.

  In addition, when the status display lamp display process is executed at a time other than when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, the status display lamp 2 indicating that the time is short is displayed only when the gaming state is the short speed. You may do it. In this way, even if the game state is internally determined to be a probabilistic state, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the probable state is a promising state. Can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process has a flag. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S21 to S37 (except for steps S30 and S32) correspond to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S38) and ends the process.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S27) in the main process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). In the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 has a first start port switch 13a or a second start for detecting that a game ball has won a first start winning port 13 provided in the game board 6. If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is made. If it has occurred (step S311), after performing the start port switch passing process (step S312), any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state. If the first start winning opening 13 or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  In step S311, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the bit corresponding to the first start winning port 13 or the second start port switch 14a is on in the input data input from the input port, for example. You may check. Further, for example, in the switch process (see step S21), the flag is set based on the fact that the first start winning port 13 or the second start port switch 14a is continuously turned on twice, and the game control is performed. The microcomputer 560 may confirm whether or not the flag is set in step S311.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The variation pattern of variable display of special symbols (corresponding to the variation time here) is determined in advance according to the values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for variation pattern extraction extracted at the time of starting winning. Select from multiple types of variation patterns. Further, control is performed to transmit information for instructing a variation pattern (a variation pattern command, that is, a variable display pattern command) to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) according to step S302.

  In this embodiment, each random number value is extracted at the time of starting winning. However, a random value for determining a variation pattern such as a random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination or a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. May be extracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing of variation pattern determination (see steps S331 and S333)). By doing so, even if a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 at the same timing, the change pattern is determined at the start timing of the change. By reading the random number value, the read random number value can be made different, and the fluctuation display can be performed with different fluctuation patterns. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the production variations of variable display of special symbols.

  Special symbol variation process (step S302): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the special symbol process timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) Is controlled to shift to a value (3 in this example) according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big prize opening. To do. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) according to step S305.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. A control for sending a presentation control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. Further, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, the control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus to close the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the post-opening process for the special winning opening is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Processing such as checking whether there is a remaining round in the big hit gaming state is performed. If there is still a remaining round, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0).

  Pre-opening process for small hits (step S308: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, Etc.), and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big winning opening. The execution time of the process during the hit release is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) according to step S309. However, in the case of starting a round, the process for opening a small hit game is a process for starting a small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for sending an effect control command for round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S308. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) according to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control to end the small hit gaming state. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning opening 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 45 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 45A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 45 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the larger one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is preferentially executed, and the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are executed. When the stored number is the same, the variable display of the special symbol with the earlier winning order set in the reserved storage specific information storage area is executed, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory are always displayed. In the case where priority is given to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the larger one of the numbers, the reserved storage specific information storage area may be omitted. In addition, depending on whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short-time state, priority is given to the variable display of any special symbol, or the variable display of one of the predetermined special symbols is displayed. When always prioritizing execution, there is no need for the reserved storage specific information storage area. By doing so, the required capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

  FIG. 45B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 45 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random number value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S3). Step S215).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start port winning designation command (step S216). Further, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number, which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating the total reserved memory number based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S218). In addition, you may transmit a pending | holding memory | storage number notification command before a 1st start opening winning designation | designated command.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random number value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted, and a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed ( Step S225).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start opening winning designation command (step S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a pending storage count notification command based on the value of the total pending storage count counter (step S228). In addition, you may transmit a pending | holding memory | storage number notification command before a 2nd start opening winning designation | designated command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer are separately provided is taken as an example, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are common. A reserved storage number buffer may be provided. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a common reserved memory number buffer provided in common for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As shown in FIG. 46, the common reserved storage number buffer includes eight areas obtained by combining the reserved storage specifying information storage area and the random value storage area. In the common reserved storage number buffer, consecutive addresses are assigned to the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area.

  When using the common reserved memory number buffer, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S213, and then replaces the process in step S214 with the first reserved memory in the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicating “first” in the specific information storage area is executed. Further, after incrementing the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S223, the CPU 56 replaces the process in step S224 with the reserved information specifying information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicating “second” is executed. Specifically, the CPU 56 determines the position of the pointer that specifies the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved memories (which may be obtained by adding the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number each time). By updating, data is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer.

  When specifying the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer, for example, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data to be stored in the common reserved memory number buffer per one reserved memory (that is, hold A value obtained by adding one storage specific information storage area) is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 46, two data storage areas, a reserved storage specific information storage area and a random value storage area, are provided in one common reserved storage number buffer. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one area of the reserved storage specific information storage area) to a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, when the total number of reserved memories is 3, as shown in FIG. 46, the reserved memory specifying information storage area corresponding to the offset value + 7 (a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories 3 and adding 1). Set the data to. In this case, when the process of step S214 is performed, the data indicating “first” is set in the reserved storage specifying information storage area, and when the process of step S224 is performed, the data indicating “second” is specified as the reserved storage. Set in the information storage area. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, the reserved storage specific information storage area and the two random number storage areas (for example, for the random value MR1 for the special figure display result determination and for the jackpot type determination) When a total of three data storage areas (for random number MR2-1) are provided, 1 is added to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by three (that is, one area for the reserved storage specific information storage area) The obtained value may be obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer may be updated according to the obtained offset value.

  When the initial position of the pointer for designating the address of the data storage destination is the first area of the common reserved memory number buffer (the reserved storage specific information storage area for the reserved storage 1 shown in FIG. 46), the CPU 56 May be obtained as an address offset value by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data stored in the common reserved memory number buffer per one reserved memory. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 46, a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories may be obtained as an address offset value. Then, the CPU 56 may perform control so that the pointer is updated by setting the position of the pointer to the position moved by the offset value from the initial position. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, a reserved storage specific information storage area and two random value storage areas (for example, for the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and for determining the jackpot type) If a total of three data storage areas for the random number MR2-1) are provided, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved storages by three may be obtained as an address offset value.

  In addition, the CPU 56 replaces the processing of steps S215 and S225 with each random number value (random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, random number value MR2-2 for reach determination. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern) are extracted and stored in the random number storage area at the head of the free area of the common reserved storage number buffer. Specifically, after setting the data in the reserved storage specific information storage area, the CPU 56 updates the position of the pointer that designates the address by one, and stores the random value in the random value storage area at the address pointed to by the updated pointer. Is stored. Note that the CPU 56 may perform the same processing for the number of types of random number values to be stored.

  47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 first checks the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S1501). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory number, which is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, is “0” based on the total reserved memory number count value or the like. Is determined (step S1501).

  If the total reserved storage number is “0”, the CPU 56 executes a demo display setting process for producing a customer waiting demonstration (step S1502). Specifically, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a demonstration display flag indicating that a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed is set. If it is set, the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is. If not set, the CPU 56 sets a demonstration display flag and transmits a demonstration display command for designating display of a customer waiting demonstration to the production control microcomputer 100.

  If the total reserved memory number is not “0”, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (step S1503). Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not both the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter are 1 or more. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the stored number counter is larger than the value of the first reserved stored number counter. If the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1507. If the second reserved memory number is not larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (step S1504). Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not both the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter are 1 or more. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the stored number counter is larger than the value of the second reserved stored number counter. If the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1503 or S1504, if either the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 displays a special symbol variation display corresponding to the non-zero reserved memory number. Control to run. For example, if the first reserved memory number is 1 or more and the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 controls to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. If the second reserved memory number is 1 or more and the first reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 performs control so as to execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

  If the first reserved memory number is not larger than the second reserved memory number (that is, if the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal), the CPU 56 determines the reserved specific area (see FIG. 45A). It is checked whether or not the first data among the data set to “1” is data indicating “first” (step S1505).

  When the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (Y in Step S1504), or when the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in Step S1505) ), The CPU 56 stores data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Setting is performed (step S1506).

  When the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (Y in step S1503), or the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, “second”). (N in step S1505), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer (step S1507).

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S1503 to S1507, the CPU 56 gives priority to the variable display of the second special symbol when the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number. Control is performed so as to execute variable display of one special symbol. Further, when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 performs control so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. As described above, by controlling so that the variation display of the special symbol having the larger number of reserved memories is executed with priority, the situation where an invalid start winning is generated is reduced.

  Note that, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first start winning opening 13 is easy to start winning, and when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state, the second starting winning opening 14 is configured to easily start winning. If it is determined that the total number of reserved memories is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state or the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set. May be. If the probability change flag or the time reduction flag is set, the process may proceed to step S1507 on the condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol may be preferentially executed. . If the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are not set, the process may proceed to step S1506 on condition that the first reserved memory number is not 0, and the change display of the first special symbol may be preferentially executed. . By doing so, it is possible to preferentially execute the change display of the special symbol that tends to accumulate the reserved memory according to the gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start winning occurs.

  Further, for example, the variable display of the second special symbol may always be executed on condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, or the first special is always provided on condition that the first reserved memory number is not 0. You may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display of a symbol.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S1508). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. Numeric values (specifically, numeric data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type) are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value (specifically, stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer). Specifically, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1509). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted. At this time, the CPU 56 deletes the oldest data indicated by the special symbol pointer among the data set in the reserved specific area, and shifts the contents of each reserved specific area. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 deletes the oldest “first” data set in the hold specific area, and sets each hold specific area. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 deletes the oldest “second” data set in the reserved specific area, and displays the contents of each reserved specific area. shift.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S1510), and transmits a reserved memory number notification command based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter after the subtraction (step S1511).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the special figure display result determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step S1512). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit” The first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A is selected and set. In this case, for example, in the process of step S1512, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 54 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in (B) is selected and set. In this case, for example, in the processing of step S1512, the storage address (first address) of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 54 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in step S1512, thereby reading the random number value for special figure display result determination read in step S1508. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data (step S1513). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is in the on state. If the probability variation flag is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the jackpot determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag on shown in FIG. Determine. If the probability variation flag is in the off state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag off shown in FIG. By doing so, when the gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that a big hit is made at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state.

  When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 matches the big hit determination value data (Y in step S1513), the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that the big hit is determined to be in an on state (step S1514). Next, the CPU 56 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S1515). Then, the CPU 56 refers to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S1515 based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2-1 read in step S1508, and determines the jackpot type as “first”. One of a plurality of types of “normal”, “second normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, and “rush probability” is determined (step S1516). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is “1”, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the special symbol pointer “1” shown in FIG. . When the value of the special symbol pointer is “2”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the special symbol pointer “2” shown in FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S1516 as “second normal” or “third probability variation”, the probability variation promotion effect is executed during the big hit game. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the determination process using the big hit type determination random number MR2-1 in step S1516, it is determined whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a probability big hit or a sudden probability big hit. At the same time, it is determined whether or not to execute the probable promotion effect during the big hit game.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation promotion effect is executed only when the second normal big hit is out of the normal big hits. However, when the normal big hit is determined, the probability variation promotion effect is always executed. It may be configured. In addition, the probability variation promotion effect may be executed not only when it is determined as a normal big hit or a probable big hit, but also when, for example, sudden probability big hit or a small hit is suddenly determined.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side shows the case where the presence or absence of the probable change promotion effect is determined together with the jackpot type, but the game control microcomputer 560 only determines the type of jackpot. It may not be determined whether or not to execute the probable promotion effect. In this case, on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect based on the reception of the effect control command at the start of change such as the change start command and the change pattern command. It may be. By doing so, the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 side can be reduced.

  When the processing of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “2”, as shown in FIG. 10, the big hit type determination for the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determination table 131 is performed. Since the random number value MR2-1 for use is not assigned, the jackpot type is not determined to be “surprising”. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent sudden sudden odd-change hits or small hits from being suddenly made when the state is shifted to the probability change state after sudden sudden change big hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he / she has lost, and to prevent a situation where the interest in the game is reduced. For example, if a sudden probability change jackpot occurs suddenly when the player is transitioning to a probability change state after a sudden probability change jackpot, the player may feel that he / she has missed a single jackpot. The situation can be prevented.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the jackpot type buffer value to any one of “00” to “05” corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S1517 (step S1517).

  When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data (N in step S1513), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination read out in step S1508 is determined as the small hit determination. It is determined whether or not the value data matches (step S1518). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is in the on state. If the probability variation flag is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag on shown in FIG. Determine whether. If the probability variation flag is off, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag off shown in FIG.

  When the processing of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “2”, the small hit determination value data is assigned in the second special diagram display result determination table 130B as shown in FIG. Because it is not, it is not determined as a small hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, only when the process of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “1” (that is, only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), it is determined as the small hit. There is a case.

  If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the small hit determination value data (Y in step S1518), the CPU 56 sets the small hit flag indicating that the small hit is determined to be in the ON state. (Step S1519). Then, control goes to a step S1520. If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result does not match the small hit determination value data (N in step S1518), the process proceeds to step S1521.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a maximum value of the number of times of winning a prize winning opening (step S1520). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, if the big hit type is any one of “first normal”, “second normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the CPU 56 receives a big prize. The maximum value of the number of times the mouth is opened is set to “15” corresponding to the game that is opened 15 times. In addition, when the big hit type is “surprise” or the small hit type is “small hit”, the CPU 56 sets the maximum value of the big winning opening number of times to “2” corresponding to the double open game. To do. Note that the CPU 56 may set the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening before the start of the big hit game (for example, special symbol stop processing or pre-opening of the big winning opening).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a confirmed special symbol corresponding to the result of determining the variable display result and determining the jackpot type (step S1521). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S1518, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S1518, the small hit symbol is displayed corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, when the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S1513, the numbers “1” and “7” that are the jackpot symbols are changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S1516. One of the special symbols shown is set as a confirmed special symbol. That is, the number of “7” that is a probability variation big hit symbol is shown according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first normal”, “second normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Set the special symbol to the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command corresponding to the gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1522). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set, and if it is set, performs control to transmit a high probability state background designation command (command 9501 (H) shown in FIG. 5). Further, if the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H) shown in FIG. 5). Therefore, in this embodiment, a high-probability state background designation command is transmitted if the gaming state is a probable change state, and a normal state background designation command is transmitted if the gaming state is other than the probability variation state (normal state or short-time state). The Note that the normal state background designation command is transmitted only when the gaming state is the normal state, and if the gaming state is the short time state (for example, if the short time flag indicating that the short time state is set). The time-short state background designation command may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S1523).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S321). If the big hit flag is on (Y in step S321), the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time reduction state (specifically, whether the probability change flag is set or the time reduction The jackpot fluctuation shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 12D, based on whether the flag is set. Any one of the pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set (step S322). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  When the big hit flag is off (N in step S321), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S323). If the small hit flag is on (Y in step S323), the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time reduction state (specifically, whether the probability variation flag is set, As a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types in accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 13D, based on whether the time reduction flag is set, the variation pattern for small hits shown in FIG. Any one of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set (step S324). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  When the small hit flag is off (N in step S323), that is, when it is out of play, it is based on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state (specifically, For determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. As the use table, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIG. 14 is selected and set (step S325).

  Next, the CPU 56 specifies the total reserved memory number by, for example, reading the count value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S326). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not there is a reach state by referring to any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S325 based on the specified total reserved storage number and the random number MR2-2 for reach determination. (Step S327). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the randomness value MR2-2 for reach determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the read random number value MR2 for reach determination. -2 determines whether or not there is a reach state.

  When the determination result indicating that the reach state is present is obtained (Y in step S328), the CPU 56 determines whether one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1 in step S328. As a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state (see FIG. 14), the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A to FIG. One of 135C is selected and set (step S329). If a determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained (N in step S328), the CPU 56 determines in step S328 that non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1. -2, use to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types depending on whether the determination result is non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2 (see FIG. 14). As the table, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIG. 17 is selected and set (step S330). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  Next, the CPU 56 refers to the use table set in any one of steps S322, S324, S329, and S330 based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and sets the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. Determine (step S331). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the random number value for determining the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type is determined based on the numerical value MR3.

  In the process of step S331, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display 8a determines the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, or the second start condition is Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol indicator 8b based on the establishment, the variation pattern type determination updated by a common random counter or the like The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random number MR3. Further, in the process of step S331, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S327, using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type is determined by a common processing module. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S331, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C (see FIGS. 18 and 19) and loss variation as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. One of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as pattern determination tables 138A and 138B (FIGS. 20 and 21) is selected and set (step S332). Next, the CPU 56 refers to the variation pattern determination table set in step S332 based on the variation pattern determination random value MR4, and thereby, among the plurality of types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined in step S331. Either one is determined (step S333). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern thus read out. Based on this, the variation pattern is determined.

  In the process of step S333, based on the fact that the first starting condition is satisfied, the first special symbol display 8a determines a variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, or the second starting condition is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not the second special symbol display unit 8b determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is updated by a common random counter or the like. One of a plurality of types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined in step S331 is determined using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4. Further, in the process of step S333, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S327, a plurality of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 used for variation pattern determination. Can be determined to be any of the types. As an example, in the process of step S333, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Next, the CPU 56 starts changing the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer (step S334). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S35 is set. Note that in the special symbol display control process of step S35 without using the start flag or the end flag, when the variation of the special symbol is controlled based only on the value of the special symbol process flag, in step S334, the CPU 56 A flag indicating whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed may be set. Further, the CPU 56 sets the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern in step S333 (step S335).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol (step S336). For example, when the special symbol pointer value is 1, the CPU 56 performs control to sequentially transmit a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a display result command from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80. When the special symbol pointer value is 2, the CPU 56 performs control to sequentially transmit the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the display result command from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80. In step S336, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag is set when it is out of place. If the time reduction flag is set, control is performed so as to transmit the first display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. If the time reduction flag is not set, control is performed so as to transmit the second display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. Note that the command is specifically transmitted by the effect symbol command control process (see step S29) performed by the CPU 56 in accordance with the setting in step S336.

  By executing the process of step S336, the CPU 56 transmits a change start command and a change pattern designation command within the same timer interrupt. Then, after transmitting the variation start command and the variation pattern designation command, the CPU 56 transmits the display result command and the pending storage number notification command every 2 msec (or every 4 msec). By doing so, the effect control microcomputer 100 can reliably receive at least a command related to the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs the process of step S336 and executes the effect symbol command control process (see step S29) according to the setting of step S336, thereby shifting to at least the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). Whether or not and a variable display pattern (variation pattern) can be specified is transmitted. As shown in this embodiment, the command transmission means may transmit the variation pattern command that can identify the variation pattern and the display result command that can identify the display result as separate commands. Only one command (for example, a variation pattern command that can specify both the variation pattern and the display result) may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S302) (step S337).

  In this embodiment, in step S327, based on the total reserved storage number, the determination process is performed using one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C illustrated in FIG. When the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memories (that is, the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is large, the frequency of executing the reach effect during the variable display is reduced. Thus, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S331, using the non-reach variation pattern type determination table set in step S330 according to the determination result in which the presence or absence of the reach state is determined based on the total number of reserved storage in step S327. When the variation pattern type is determined and the variation pattern is finally determined in step S333, the variation pattern for the shortened variation is determined when the total number of reserved memories is large when the reach effect is not executed and the reach effect is not executed. Is done. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of reserved memories is 3 or 4, it is determined to be non-reach PA1-2, which is a variation pattern for shortening, and the total number of reserved memories is When the number is 5 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PA1-3 which is a variation pattern for shortening. Further, when the gaming state is a probable change state and the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PB1-2 that is a variation pattern for shortening. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state and the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PC1-2 that is a variation pattern for shortening.

  In this embodiment, the special figure display result is obtained from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter when the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. All of random number MR1 for determination, random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, random value MR2-2 for reach determination, random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and random value MR4 for variation pattern determination Although the case where it is extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer is shown, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are started. You may make it extract not at the time of winning a prize but at the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol.

  For example, when the random numbers MR3 and MR4 are extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the CPU 56 performs the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch in the start port switch passing process. When ON of 14a is detected (see steps S211 and S221), a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random for determining a jackpot type, among numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter Only the numerical value MR2-1 and the random number MR2-2 for reach determination are extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (see steps S215 and S225). Further, in step S331 of the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 extracts the variation pattern type determination random number MR3 from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter, and extracts the extracted variation pattern type determination. The variation pattern type is determined based on the random number MR3. Further, in step S333 of the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 extracts the variation pattern determination random value MR4 from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter, and extracts the variation pattern determination. A variation pattern is determined based on the random value MR4.

  For example, all random values including the random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination and the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination are extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer. Then, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 by chance at the same time, the storage area of the first reserved storage buffer and the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer May store the same random value. If it does so, the situation where change display will be performed according to the same change pattern will occur by the change display of the 1st special symbol and change display of the 2nd special symbol which are performed after that. On the other hand, as described above, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted at the start of variation, the first start winning opening 13 and the second Even when a game ball wins at the start winning opening 14 at the same time, the variation pattern may be different between the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol executed thereafter. it can.

  In this embodiment, the random number value MR2-2 for reach determination, the random value MR3 for change pattern type determination, and the random value MR4 for change pattern determination are randomly updated using, for example, a refresh register. be able to. By doing so, the variation pattern used for the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined more randomly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, first, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by 1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0). The special symbol variation process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S303 (step S353).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation stop process, the CPU 56 stops the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stopped symbol (step S1301). For example, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S35 to end the variation of the special symbol, and displays a stop symbol on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control to display and display. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a decoration symbol stop designation command (8F00 (H)) for designating stoppage of the variation of the decoration symbol in the effect display device 9 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1302). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1303).

  If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 56 displays the jackpot symbol after stopping the jackpot symbol on the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. Is set (step S1304) for the execution time (big hit display time (eg, 3 seconds)) of the effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the game will start. Then, the CPU 56 transmits a hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1305).

  Next, the CPU 56 resets the big hit flag (step S1306), and if it is set, resets the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the time reduction counter (step S1307). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S304 (step S1308).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S1303, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the hourly flag is set (step S1309). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1313. If it is set, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the time reduction counter (step S1310) and checks whether the value after subtraction of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1311). The time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of execution times of the special symbol and decorative symbol change display after shifting to the time reduction state.

  If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1313 as it is. If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S1312). That is, after shifting to the time-saving state after the big hit, the special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), so the time-saving flag is reset and the normal state is entered.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1313). If the small winning flag is set (Y in step S1313), the CPU 56 stops displaying the small winning symbol on the large winning opening control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening. An execution time (small hit display time (for example, 3 seconds)) for informing the player that the small hit game is started (fanfare display effect) is set (step S1314). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1315).

  Next, the CPU 56 resets the small hit flag (step S1316). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S308 (step S1317).

  If the small hit flag is not set in step S1313, the CPU 56 updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S1318).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S461). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S462). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S462), the process is terminated.

  If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S462), the CPU 56 reads the big hit type buffer value determined in step S1516 (step S463). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the read jackpot type buffer value is “00” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S464). In this case, if the big hit type buffer value is “00” or “01” (Y in step S464), the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag to start control to the time reduction state (step S465), and A predetermined value (for example, “100”) is set in the hour / times counter (step S466). Then, control goes to a step S470.

  If the big hit type buffer value is other than “00” and “01” in step S464 (N in step S313), a probability variation flag is set (step S467) in order to start control to the probability variation state. A time reduction flag is set (step S468). Further, a predetermined value (for example, “100”) is set in the time reduction counter (step S469). Then, control goes to a step S470. Note that the time reduction state may be continued until the next big hit occurs without setting a predetermined value in the time reduction number counter in step S469.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S470).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 33 ms) (step S701). .

  Next, the production control CPU 101 executes random number update processing for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a predetermined random number (see FIG. 22) (step S702), and monitors the timer interrupt flag (step S703). Transition to the loop processing to be performed. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S704) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S705). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S706). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  55 and 56 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process (step S705) in the main process. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S1611). When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads out the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S1612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 81XX (H)) designated by a change pattern (step S1613), the effect control CPU 101 stores the EXT data of the command in the change pattern data in the RAM. The data is stored in the area (step S1614), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1615).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command for specifying a display result (display result command: 8CXX (H)) (step S1616), the effect control CPU 101 stores the EXT data of the command in the fluctuation pattern data in the RAM. In the area (step S1617), a display result reception flag is set (step S1618).

  If the received effect control command is a fanfare-designated effect control command (fanfare command: A0XX (H)) (step S1619), the effect control CPU 101 stores the EXT data of the command in the fanfare data storage area in the RAM. (Step S1620), and a fanfare flag indicating that the fanfare command has been received is set (step S1621).

  If the received effect control command is an ending-designated effect control command (ending command: A3XX (H)) (step S1622), the effect control CPU 101 uses the EXT data of the command as the ending data storage area in the RAM. (Step S1623), and an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (step S1624).

  If the received effect control command is a high-probability state background designation command (command 9501 (H)) (step S1625), the effect control CPU 101 performs an unspecified display as to whether or not it is in a probable state. It is confirmed whether or not an unspecified display flag for designating is set (step S1626). The unspecified display flag is set based on the fact that the probability change promotion operation has failed when the probability change promotion effect described later is executed. If the unspecified display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a red background as the background color on the effect display device 9 (step S1627). If the unspecified display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1629.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H)) (step S1628), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a green background as the background color on the effect display device 9. Is performed (step S1629). Even when the unspecified display flag is set in step S <b> 1625, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S <b> 1629 and performs control to display a green background as a background color on the effect display device 9.

  When the processing of steps S1625 to S1629 is executed, and it is already informed that the jackpot has been executed after the jackpot has been determined after being determined to be a probability change jackpot, the effect display device 9 displays a red color. The background is displayed, and effects such as decorative pattern change display are performed in a state in which it is possible to recognize that the probability variation state. In addition, even after a big hit is executed after it has been determined to be a normal big hit, or even after a big hit is executed after being determined to be a promising big hit, the promotion operation to the positive change fails in the probable promotion effect, and it becomes probable. Is not notified, a green background is displayed on the effect display device 9, and an effect such as a variation display of decorative symbols is performed in a state in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not it is in a probable variation state. It should be noted that such an effect in which it is not possible to recognize whether or not the state is in a probable state is continued even during the decorative symbol variation display.

  When a normal state background designation command is received, the background may be displayed on the effect display device 9 with a background color (for example, blue) indicating that the gaming state is the normal state. In this case, even if it is determined that the probability change big hit, if it is not notified that the promotion operation to the probability change has failed in the probability change promotion effect and the probability change will not occur, the gaming state is the normal state. The background may be displayed on the effect display device 9 with the same background color (for example, blue) as in the case. Even in such a case, even if it is determined that it is a normal jackpot, or even if it is determined that the probability variation jackpot, it is not notified that the promotion operation to the probability change has failed in the probability variation promotion effect and the probability change will not occur In other words, it is possible to perform effects such as decorative pattern change display in a state in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not the state is a certain variation state.

  In addition, for example, when the gaming state is the time-short state, when the time-short state background designation command is transmitted, the effect display device 9 is further different when the time-short state background designation command is received. The background may be displayed on the effect display device 9 with a background color (for example, yellow). Also, instead of always displaying a red background when it is already informed that it will be probabilistic, it is shifted only to the high probability state, and it is shifted to the high probability state and also to the short time state. It is also possible to display the background of a different background color on the effect display device 9 depending on the case where it is performed. In this case, when the game ball is in a high base state where it is easy to start and win, the same background color (for example, yellow) as that in the short time state is displayed, and in a low base state where the game ball is difficult to start and win. In some cases, the same background color (for example, blue) as in the normal state may be displayed.

  If the received effect control command is the first variation start designation command (command 8001 (H)) (step S1630), the effect control CPU 101 displays the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. A first variation start flag indicating that variation display is to be started is set (step S1631).

  Also, if the received effect control command is the second variation start designation command (command 8002 (H)) (step S1632), the effect control CPU 101 displays the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. A second variation start flag indicating that variation display is to be started is set (step S1633).

  If the effect control command received is a decoration symbol stop designation command (command 8F00 (H)) (step S1634), the effect control CPU 101 designates a decoration symbol stop designation indicating that the decoration symbol stop designation command has been received. A reception flag is set (step S1635).

  If the received command read in step S1612 is another effect control command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1636).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S706) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation start command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Further, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the first variation start command reception flag, the second variation start command reception flag, and the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis processing are set. If either the first variation start command or the second variation start command and the variation pattern command are received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (decoration symbol stop designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the decoration symbol fluctuation is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, display control of the number of rounds is performed based on a display command indicating that the special winning opening is being opened. If it is decided to execute the probable change promotion effect, the probable change promotion effect is executed in round 15.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, the interval display is performed based on a display command after opening the big winning opening indicating that the big winning opening is after being opened (during closing).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  In addition, similar to the control based on the display control execution data, the effect control CPU 101 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and obtains the sound number data. Output to the audio output board 70.

  The process data shown in FIG. 58 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the display result command or data indicating the display result command from the display result command storage area (step S820). Then, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display result is “lost” (step S821). If the variable display result is “losing” (Y in step S821), the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command or data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S822). Then, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the designated variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S823).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs a variation in which the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command executes a specific effect of “end of development chance eye”. It is determined whether or not it is a pattern (step S824). As an example, if it is determined in step S823 that the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 7), “ It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect “end of development opportunity end”.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” (Y in step S824), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final stop symbol constituting one of the development chance points HC1 to HC8. The combination of the determined decorative symbols is determined (step S825). As an example, in the process of step S825, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4 and FZ1- that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. 5. The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is not the execution pattern for executing the specific effect “end of development chance” (N in step S824), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination. A non-reach symbol determination process for determining a combination is executed (step S826).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of non-reach symbol determination processing. In the non-reach symbol determination process, the production control CPU 101 first selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 23A as a use table (step S2601). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2602). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A (step S2603). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B as a use table (step S2604). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2605). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B (step S2606).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 24 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, thereby obtaining the left / right outcome. It is determined which type DC1-1 is a plurality of types. Then, the production control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C as a use table according to the determined left and right outcome type (step S2607). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2608). Then, based on the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C (step) S2609).

  As described above, in the non-reach symbol determination process in step S826, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are referred to by referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161. By determining the decorative pattern to be obtained, the combination of the confirmed decorative pattern does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 5B, sudden chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 5C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Nor.

  When it is determined that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (N in step S823), the production control CPU 101 executes a reach symbol determination process for determining a combination of a definite decorative symbol as a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination. (Step S827).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach symbol determination processing. In the reach symbol determination process, the production control CPU 101 first selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 26A as a use table (step S2701). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2702). Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. Determine (step S2703). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 26B as a use table (step S2704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the third final stop symbol determining random number SR1-3 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2705). Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference (step S2706).

  As described above, in the reach symbol determination process of step S827, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “left” other than the “medium” ornament symbol display area where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2, which are stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area, are determined. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1 in the “medium” decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. , The design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  When the variable display result is other than “losing” (N in step S821), the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit. It is determined whether the type is “surprise” or any other one (step S828). When the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (Y in step S828), the presentation control CPU 101 in step S822. It is determined whether the read variation pattern is any of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S829).

  As shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. Therefore, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 (Y in step S829), the process proceeds to the process in step S824, and in steps S825 and S826. By one of the processes, the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined. If it is determined in step S829 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command in step S824 is the special PG1- If the variation pattern is 4 (see FIG. 8), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of the development chance”.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 (N in step S829), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the designated variation pattern is the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3. It is determined whether the pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns or other patterns (step S830).

  As shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3 specify that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. Therefore, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is any of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 (Y in step S830), the process proceeds to the process in step S827 to configure the reach combination. Determine the final decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3 (N in step S830), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the designated variation pattern is the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3. One of the fluctuation patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 8, any of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 is that the combination of the finalized decorative symbols resulting in the variable display result of the decorative symbols is any one of the chance chance items TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4. It is specified. The CPU 101 for effect control responds to the fact that any one of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 is designated, and the definite decoration that becomes the final stop symbol constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. A combination of symbols is determined (step S831). As an example, in the process of step S831, the sudden probability change final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 27D is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1 that becomes one of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4 by suddenly referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163D at the time of probability change. , FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 are determined as fixed decorative symbols. Then, control goes to a step S837.

  When the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (N in step S828), the effect control CPU 101 determines the big hit type among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”. Is determined to be either one of “first normal big hit” or “second normal big hit” or any other (step S832). When the big hit type is “first normal big hit”, or when the big hit type is “second normal big hit” (Y in step S832), the CPU 101 for effect control shows the first big hit type shown in FIG. 1 The final stop symbol determination table 163A is used to determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol (step S833). As an example, in the process of step S833, the CPU 101 for effect control selects and sets the first final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the first final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1 and FZ3 that become even symbols that are non-probable variable symbols -2 and the combination of FZ3-3 are determined as finalized decorative symbols. Then, control goes to a step S837.

  When the big hit type is neither “first normal big hit” nor “second normal big hit” (N in step S832), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the big hit type is the “big hit” among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not it is “third probability variation big hit” (step S834). When the big hit type is “third probability variation big hit” (Y in Step S834), the effect control CPU 101 becomes the final stop symbol using the second final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. A combination of confirmed decorative symbols is determined (step S835). As an example, in the process of step S835, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the second final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the second final stop symbol determination table 163B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1 and FZ3 that become even symbols that are non-probable variable symbols. -2, FZ3-3 combination, and determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. Then, control goes to a step S837.

  In the processing of steps S832 to S835, the effect control CPU 101 uses the table shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, so that the symbol “4” is greater at the time of the third likelihood big hit than at the normal big hit. ”,“ 6 ”, and“ 8 ”are determined as the stop symbols so that the determined decorative symbol is higher than the ratio at which the symbol“ 2 ”is determined as the stop symbol. Therefore, even when the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “4”, “6”, and “8” are stopped and displayed, “2” is stopped and displayed. It is possible to raise a sense of expectation for certainty than the case. Further, the effect control CPU 101 uses the tables shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B to determine the symbol “8” as the stop symbol at the time of the third likelihood big hit compared to the normal big hit. The confirmed decorative design is determined so that the ratio is higher than the ratio in which the symbols “4” and “6” are determined as the stop symbols. Accordingly, even when the non-probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “8” is stopped and displayed, “4” and “6” are more probable than when the symbol is stopped and displayed. You can increase your expectation.

  When the big hit type is not “third probability variable big hit” (N in step S834), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the big hit type is either “first positive variable big hit” or “second positive variable big hit”. Correspondingly, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that become the final stop symbols is determined using the third final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 27C (step S834). As an example, in the process of step S834, the CPU 101 for effect control selects and sets the third final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the third final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the middle left which becomes either an odd symbol which is a probability variable symbol or an even symbol which is a non-probable variable symbol The combination of the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative symbol. Then, control goes to a step S837.

  In the process of step S836, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the third final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. A non-probable variable symbol may be derived and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol at a low rate. By doing so, even if a non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be a probable big hit and improve the interest in the game. .

  Also, in the process of step S836, the effect control CPU 101 uses the third final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 27C, and thereby includes symbols “4”, “6”, “ The finalized decorative symbol is determined such that the rate at which “8” is determined as the stop symbol is higher than the rate at which symbol “2” is determined as the stop symbol. Therefore, even when the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “4”, “6”, and “8” are stopped and displayed, “2” is stopped and displayed. It is possible to raise a sense of expectation for certainty than the case. In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control has such a ratio that the symbol “8” is determined as the stop symbol in the non-probable variable symbols so that the proportions where the symbols “4” and “6” are determined as the stop symbol is higher. Determine the final decorative pattern. Accordingly, even when the non-probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, when “8” is stopped and displayed, “4” and “6” are more probable than when the symbol is stopped and displayed. You can increase your expectation.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process (step S837). FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S837. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern including a specific effect (step S3501). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect (N in step S3501), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern includes a specific effect (Y in step S3501), the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, or other specific effects. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3502). If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets a specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as a use table ( Step S3503). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set, and in the case of the “intro” specific effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28C is set.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S3504). As an example, in the case of a “slip” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern, for example, from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is set to one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S3503. decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract numerical data. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-2, the specific effect pattern is set to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S3503. Decide on. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses a numerical value indicating the third specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-3 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract data. In this case, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S3505). If the specific effect is “intro” (Y in step S3505), it is determined in step S3504. In accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3, the previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in specific effect pattern determination table 164C (step S3506). For example, if the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 1. If the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-2 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 2. If the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-3 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 3.

  As described above, by executing the processing of step S3506, intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” Each time it is determined as one of the specific effect patterns, it can be updated so that the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the determined specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is set. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. In the process of step S3504, when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 28C is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S3502 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, or “intro”, or if it is determined in step S3505 that the specific effect is other than “intro”, the process of step S3506 is executed. After that, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the specific effect is any one of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “expansion chance”, or a specific effect other than these (step S3507). ). If it is a specific effect other than “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “development chance” (N in step S3507), the specific effect setting process is terminated. If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance” (Y in step S3507), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined (step S3508). Then, the specific effect setting process ends.

  In the process of step S3508, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the table selection setting shown in FIG. 29E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S3504. Any one of the stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating a random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, in the case of a specific production of “pseudo-continuous”, the production control CPU 101 first sets the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change to a constant M based on the specific production pattern determined in step S3504. To do. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. In this case, the production control CPU 101 sets a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A is selected and set as a use table, while the variation pattern is super PA 3-4, super In the case of any one of PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super PF1-1, and special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is obtained. The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the variable N and updates it, and determines whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  As described above, if the updated variable N matches the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process of step S3508. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the variable N and updates it, and determines whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  As described above, if the updated variable N matches the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process of step S3508. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2, and the combination of KZ4-3 is determined. After the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 is determined by such processing, the processing in step S3508 is terminated.

  As yet another example, in the case of a specific development of “Development Chance”, the production control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 32 as a usage table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating a random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect setting process (step S838). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S838. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first selects and sets the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 33 as a use table (step S3701). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S3702). Then, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S3702, there is no notice or the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. Either one is determined (step S3703). In this case, if it is determined that there is no previous notice (N in step S3704), the effect control CPU 101 ends the notice effect setting process.

  When it is determined to be one of the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 (Y in step S3704), the effect control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 34 according to the decided notice pattern type. 35, one of the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 35 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 36 is selected and set as a use table (step S3705). That is, if the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined in step S3703, the notice pattern determination table 171A is set, and if the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern determination table 171B is set. When the CY3 notice pattern type is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is set. After that, the effect control CPU 101 determines any one of a plurality of types of notice patterns (step S3706), and then ends the notice effect setting process.

  In the process of step S3706, as an example, when the notice control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern type as notice CY1, for example, from the random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, the first notice pattern determination Numerical data indicating the random value SR8-1 is extracted. Then, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random value SR8-1, the notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S3705 is referred to, so that the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed. Decide on one.

  As another example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines the notice pattern type to notice CY2, for example, from the random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, the second notice pattern determination disturbance Numerical data indicating the numerical value SR8-2 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-2, the notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S3705 is referred to, so that the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Decide on one.

  As yet another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY3, the effect control CPU 101 uses, for example, a random counter for determining the third notice pattern from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating SR8-3 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-3, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S3705, there is no notice or the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. Decide on one.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S839). Then, the process timer corresponding to the effect execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S840). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 27L, 27R as effect parts is executed (step S841). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speakers 27L and 27R.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S842), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S843).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs the processing of steps S825, S826, S827, S831, S833, S835, and S836, thereby identifying the derivation and display as a display result on the plurality of variable display units in the effect display device 9. An identification information determining means for determining information from a plurality of types is realized. Note that the identification information determining means may also be configured for a portion where the CPU 56 determines a temporary stop symbol such as step S3508.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the decorative symbol stop designation reception flag is set (step S1831). The decorative symbol stop designation reception flag is set based on the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command in the command analysis process (see step S1635). If the decorative symbol stop designation reception flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1839. If not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S1832). If the variable time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1839. In step S1839, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a decorative design stop designation command has been received (see step S1831), and whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (see step S1832) is determined. Although the case of shifting to the variation stop process is shown, it may be determined only whether or not the decorative symbol stop designation command has been received, and the transition to the decorative symbol variation stop process may be performed. In this case, if the decorative symbol stop designation reception flag is not set in step S1831, the CPU 56 may proceed to step S1833 without executing step S1832.

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S1833) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S1834). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speakers 27L, 27R) according to the contents of the process data n (step S1835). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1836), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1837). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1838).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a decorative symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (step S871). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, as described later, when a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S878. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S870 is a stage where the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and therefore the decorative symbol stop symbol in steps S871 to S873 is displayed. The process proceeds to step S877 without repeatedly executing the processing.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S872). Then, when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in step S872 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed: N in step S873), the effect control CPU 101 receives a predetermined flag (for example, decorative symbol stop designation reception). (Flag) is reset (step S874), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S875).

  In step S874, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that an unspecified display flag and an operation condition establishment flag, which will be described later, are not reset. However, the effect control CPU 101 counts, for example, the number of times the decorative symbol variable display is executed after the gaming state has shifted to the short time state, and the number of times the decorative symbol variable display is executed is a predetermined short time in step S874. If it is determined that the number of times (for example, 100 times) has been reached, if the unspecified display flag is set, the unspecified display flag is reset.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed in step S872 (Y in step S873), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876) and checks whether the fanfare flag is set. (Step S877). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S877), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878) and selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S879). Then, the process timer is started (step S880), and if it is set, the unspecified display flag is reset (step S881). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S882).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the big winning opening open display command has been received is set (step S901). When the big prize opening opening flag is not set (N in step S901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the apparatus 9, the speakers 27L and 27R, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the effect control CPU 101 performs the round presentation (the round display corresponding to the number of rounds is based on the contents of the big prize opening open display command). An effect to be executed is selected (step S907). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round process (step S805) (step S911).

  68 to 70 are flowcharts showing the round process (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S1901). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that the display command after opening the big prize opening is received is set. (Step S1902).

  If the flag after the big prize opening is not set (N in step S1902), the CPU 101 for effect control is surely changed when the big hit game is played based on the variable display result of the first special symbol being the big hit. It is confirmed whether or not a first certain change promotion effect execution flag indicating execution of the promotion effect is set (step S1903). Also, when the first probability variation promotion effect execution flag is not set (N in step S1903), the effect control CPU 101 performs a jackpot game based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. It is confirmed whether or not a second certain variation promotion effect execution flag indicating that the certain variation promotion effect is to be executed is set (step S1904). Note that the first probability variation promotion effect execution flag and the second probability variation promotion effect execution flag are set based on the second normal jackpot or the third probability variation jackpot in the post-round processing described later (see steps S1983 and S1987). .

  When the second certain change promotion effect execution flag is not set (N in step S1904), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1905), and the effect device (effect Control of the display device 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1906). For example, the effect display device 9 displays the jackpot display symbol, and the effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1907), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1908). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1909).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S1902 (Y in step S1902), the effect control CPU 101 uses the interval effect (the interval corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command after the big prize opening is opened. A display effect) is selected (step S1910). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag after opening the special winning opening (step S1911), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S1912). Then, the process timer is started (step S1913), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S1914).

  When the ending flag is set in step S1901 (Y in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the ending flag (step S1915) and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S1916). In addition, the production control CPU 101 starts the production period measurement timer and starts the process timer (step S1917). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807) (step S1918).

  When the first probability change promotion effect execution flag is set in step S1903 (Y in step S1903), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer (step S1920). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control, based on the value of the effect period measurement timer after the subtraction, is the probability change promotion effect start time that is the execution start time of the probability change promotion effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the round effect of round 15). It is confirmed whether or not elapses (step S1921). If the probability variation promotion effect start time has not elapsed (N in step S1921), the process proceeds to step S1905. In this case, the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 is executed until the probable promotion effect start time is reached, thereby displaying the same effect as the normal round effect (for example, the jackpot display symbol is displayed on the effect display device 9). The effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds and other characters) is executed.

  If the probability variation promotion effect start time has elapsed (Y in step S1921), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step S1922). Then, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (effect display device 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S1923). For example, the effect control CPU 101 displays the meter on the effect display device 9 as described later, and performs an effect of displaying the level of the meter according to the value of the operation number counter described later. In addition, for example, an effect is displayed in which a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the effect display device 9 and a message prompting the user to repeatedly press the operation button 120 so that the level of the meter increases to the maximum as the character's speech. Is done.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 has passed the probability change promotion effect end time (for example, 15 seconds after the start of the round effect of round 15), which is the end time of the probability change promotion effect, based on the value of the effect period measurement timer. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1924). If the promising promotion promotion end time has not elapsed (N in step S1924), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an ON signal from the operation button 120 has been detected (step S1925). If an on signal from the operation button 120 is not detected (that is, if the operation button 120 is not operated by the player), the process proceeds to step S1907. When the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected (that is, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player), the effect control CPU 101 displays an operation number counter indicating the number of times the player has operated the operation button 120. 1 is added (step S1926). Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the operation counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the predetermined condition satisfaction number (step S1927).

  The predetermined condition satisfaction count is the number of times the operation button 120 is operated to establish a notification execution condition (hereinafter referred to as a probability change notification execution condition) that the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state after the big hit game ends. . In this embodiment, 10 is set in advance as a default value for the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the player succeeds in hitting the operation button 120 ten times within the execution period of the probability change promotion effect in the effect during round (in this embodiment, the effect during round 15 in this embodiment), the number of operations in step S1927. It is determined that the value of the counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined condition satisfaction number, and it is determined that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when the player cannot establish the probability change notification execution condition by operating the operation button 120 during the previous execution of the probability change promotion effect (for example, the probability change promotion). If the player cannot hit the operation button 120 ten times within the performance execution period), the predetermined condition satisfaction count is changed to 5 times, and the operation difficulty for establishing the probability change notification execution condition Changed to be lower. In this case, if the player succeeds in hitting the operation button 120 five times within the execution period of the probability change promotion effect in the effect during the round (in this embodiment, the effect during the round 15), the operation is performed in step S1927. It is determined that the value of the number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined condition, and it is determined that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined that the value of the operation number counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined condition satisfaction number (Y in step S1927), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied, and the operation using the operation button 120 is successful. Then, an operation condition satisfaction flag indicating that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied is set (step S1928). Then, control goes to a step S1907. If the value of the operation number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined condition satisfaction number (N in step S1927), the process proceeds to step S1907.

  If the probable promotion promotion end time has elapsed (Y in step S1924), the presentation control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation condition establishment flag is set (step S1929). If the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1932. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit (step S1930). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit based on the display result command stored in the display result command storage area or the data indicating the display result command. judge.

  If the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit (Y in step S1930), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display that the effect display device 9 is promoted to probability variation (step S1931). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display a character string such as “Promoted to probability change!” On the effect display device 9.

  When the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set (N in step S1929), or when the variable display result is not the third probability variation big hit (that is, the second normal big hit), the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to Control is performed to superimpose and display that the promotion to probability change has failed (step S1932). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display a character string such as “Sorry! Promotion failure” on the effect display device 9. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets an unspecified display flag (step S1933). That is, in this case, although it is a probable big hit, the player has failed in the operation using the operation button 120 and has not been able to establish the probable change notification execution condition, or is usually a big hit, the effect display device 9 An unspecified display flag is set in order to superimpose the fact that the promotion to probability change has failed and to make it impossible to specify whether or not the probability change state is present after the big hit.

  In this embodiment, by performing the determination in step S1930, even if the player hits the operation button 120 more than the predetermined number of times and the probability variation notification execution condition is satisfied, the second normal big hit If it is determined, control is performed so as to superimpose that the promotion to probability change has failed. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 may perform display control as if the meter level did not reach the maximum in the effect display device 9 regardless of the value of the operation counter.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the player succeeds in operating the operation button 120 and the probability variation notification execution condition is satisfied, the player is notified of the fact that the player has been promoted to probability variation after the probability variation promotion end time has elapsed. However, after it is determined in step S1927 that the predetermined condition is satisfied or more, and the operation condition satisfaction flag is set in step S1928, the processing of steps S1930 and S1931 is immediately executed to notify that the promotion has been promoted to certain change. May be.

  When the second probability change promotion effect execution flag is set in step S1904 (Y in step S1904), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer (step S1940). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control, based on the value of the effect period measurement timer after the subtraction, is the probability change promotion effect start time that is the execution start time of the probability change promotion effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the round effect of round 15). It is confirmed whether or not elapses (step S1941). If the probability variation promotion effect start time has not elapsed (N in step S1941), the process proceeds to step S1905. In this case, the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 is executed until the probable promotion effect start time is reached, thereby displaying the same effect as the normal round effect (for example, the jackpot display symbol is displayed on the effect display device 9). The effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds and other characters) is executed.

  If the probability change promotion effect start time has elapsed (Y in step S1941), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step S1942). Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect devices (effect display device 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S1943). For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display a meter and produces an effect of increasing the meter level at a predetermined speed, as will be described later. In addition, for example, a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the effect display device 9, and an effect is displayed that prompts the user to operate the operation button 120 at the timing when the meter level increases to the maximum as a character line. In addition, the level of the meter displayed on the effect display device 9 is, for example, from the probability change promotion effect start time (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the round effect of round 15) to the probability change promotion effect end time (for example, round 15). The production is performed such that it gradually increases over a period of time from the start of the round production until 15 seconds elapses and reaches the maximum point.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 has passed the probability change promotion effect end time (for example, 15 seconds after the start of the round effect of round 15), which is the end time of the probability change promotion effect, based on the value of the effect period measurement timer. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1944). If the promising promotion promotion end time has not elapsed (N in Step S1944), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an ON signal from the operation button 120 has been detected (Step S1945). If an on signal from the operation button 120 is not detected (that is, if the operation button 120 is not operated by the player), the process proceeds to step S1907. When the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected (that is, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the operation success time period is within a predetermined operation success period based on the value of the effect period measurement timer. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1947).

  The predetermined operation success period is an operation period of the operation button 120 for establishing the probability change notification execution condition. In this embodiment, as a default value of a predetermined operation success period, for example, 1.0 second from the start of the round effect of round 15 to the end of 14 seconds after the lapse of 13 seconds is set. Therefore, in the effect during the round (in this embodiment, the effect during the round 15), the player presses the operation button 120 within the execution period of the probable promotion effect from 13 seconds to 14 seconds after the start of the round effect. If the operation is successful for 1.0 second, it is determined in step S1927 that the operation is within the predetermined operation success period, and it is determined that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied. In this case, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example, a display as if the operation of the operation button 120 was successful at the timing when the level of the meter is maximized is performed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the player cannot establish the probability change notification execution condition by operating the operation button 120 during the previous execution of the probability change promotion effect (for example, the probability change promotion). When the player cannot operate the operation button 120 within the predetermined operation success period within the performance execution period), the predetermined operation success period is, for example, 14. It is changed to 1.5 seconds until 5 seconds have elapsed, and the operation difficulty level for satisfying the probability change notification execution condition is changed. In this case, in the production during the round (in this embodiment, the production during the round 15), the player presses the operation button 120 within the execution period of the probability change promotion production for 14.5 seconds after 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round production. If the operation is successful for 1.5 seconds until the elapsed time, it is determined in step S1947 that the predetermined scanning success period is reached, and it is determined that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined that it is within the predetermined operation success period (Y in step S1947), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied, and sets the operation condition satisfaction flag (step S1948). Then, control goes to a step S1907. If it is determined that it is not within the predetermined operation success period (N in step S1947), the process proceeds to step S1907 as it is.

  If the probability variation promotion end time has elapsed (Y in step S1944), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation condition establishment flag is set (step S1949). If the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1952. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit (step S1950). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit based on the display result command stored in the display result command storage area or the data indicating the display result command. judge.

  If the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit (Y in step S1950), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose the effect display device 9 on the effect display device 9 (step S1951). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display a character string such as “Promoted to probability change!” On the effect display device 9.

  When the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set (N in step S1949), or when the variable display result is not the third probability variation big hit (that is, the second normal big hit), the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to Control is performed to superimpose and display that the promotion to probability change has failed (step S1952). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display a character string such as “Sorry! Promotion failure” on the effect display device 9. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an unspecified display flag (step S1953). That is, in this case, although it is a probable big hit, the player has failed in the operation using the operation button 120 and has not been able to establish the probable change notification execution condition, or is usually a big hit, the effect display device 9 An unspecified display flag is set in order to superimpose the fact that the promotion to probability change has failed and to make it impossible to specify whether or not the probability change state is present after the big hit.

  In this embodiment, by performing the determination in step S1950, even if the player operates the operation button 120 within a predetermined operation success period and establishes the probability change notification execution condition, the second normal If it is determined to be a big hit, control is performed so as to superimpose that the promotion to probability change has failed. In this case, for example, whether or not the effect control CPU 101 has operated the operation button 120 at a timing at which the level of the meter is other than the maximum in the effect display device 9 regardless of whether or not it is within a predetermined operation success period. Such display control may be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the player has successfully operated the operation button 120 for a predetermined operation success period and the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied, the probability change promotion effect end time elapses and the probability is promoted to probability change. In this case, it is determined that it is the predetermined operation success period in step S1947, and after setting the operation condition establishment flag in step S1948, the processing of steps S1950 and S1951 is immediately executed to be promoted to certainty. You may make it alert | report to the effect.

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S1903, S1904, S1920 to S1933, and S1940 to S1953 is executed, so that the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, resulting in a big hit gaming state. Probability change promotion effects of different modes are executed in the case of transition and in the case of transition to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. Specifically, in the first probability variation promotion effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol is a big hit, it is a condition that the player repeatedly hits the operation button 120 for a predetermined condition number of times or more. In the second certainty-elevated promotion effect, which is executed based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the player presses the operation button 120 in a predetermined manner. An effect of notifying that the operation has been promoted to a certain condition on the condition that the operation is performed within the operation success period is executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variety of games in a configuration capable of variably displaying a plurality of special symbols.

  In addition, the production mode of the probable promotion effect is not limited to the one shown above. For example, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the left middle right decorative symbol using the effect display device 9 in the probability change promotion effect, and detects the ON signal from the operation button 120, thereby detecting the left center right You may perform the production | presentation which stops and displays a decorative design. For example, based on the fact that the player has operated the operation button 120 three times, the effect control CPU 101 stops and displays a decorative symbol corresponding to the operation in the order of left and right. In this case, when it is determined in advance that the third probability variation big hit will be made, if the player operates the operation button 120 at the timing when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern, the effect control CPU 101 The final stop is made with the right decorative symbols aligned with the same probability variation. In other words, the probability variation notification execution condition is satisfied, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same probability variation symbols are aligned, and the fact that the probability variation has been promoted is notified. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 may change the speed at which the decorative symbols fluctuate according to the operation difficulty level. For example, the production control CPU 101 may increase the speed at which the decorative symbol fluctuates when the set operation difficulty level is high, and may decrease the speed at which the decorative symbol fluctuates when the set operation difficulty level is low. Further, the production control CPU 101 sets the number of pull-in in step S548 in accordance with the operation difficulty level, and the maximum number of symbol pull-in from the detection of the ON signal of the operation button 120 to the stop of the symbol variation. (The maximum number of symbols to be changed after detecting the ON signal of the operation button 120) may be changed. For example, when the set operation difficulty level is high, the effect control CPU 101 sets the number of symbols drawn to 0 (finally stops the change of the symbol at the timing when the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected), and sets the operation difficulty level. When the degree is low, the number of symbols drawn may be 4 at the maximum (after the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected, the symbol is changed by a maximum of 4 symbols and finally stopped). Then, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied based on the timing at which the operation button 120 is operated and the maximum number of pull-ins set as the operation difficulty level, and according to the determination result. You may make it stop a symbol. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 85 to be described later, when “7” is stopped at the position “6” of the middle reel shown in FIG. 85 (3), when the number of pull-in is 0, “7” at the position “6”. However, when the number of pull-in is 4, if the operation button 120 is operated when the symbol “7” is above the position “6” within the range of 4 symbols, “6” “7” may stop at the position. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine includes one operation button 120 has been described, but the gaming machine may include three operation buttons corresponding to the decorative symbols (for example, in FIG. 85, The case where there are three push buttons corresponding to each decorative pattern is shown).

  Further, for example, when the gaming machine is provided with three left, middle, and right rotating drums (rotary reels) that are driven to rotate by a drum motor separately from the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect display device 9), In the probability variation promotion effect, the CPU 101 may perform the probability variation promotion effect by rotating the left middle right rotating drum. And based on having detected the ON signal from the operation button 120, you may perform the effect which stops the rotation drum of the left middle right. For example, based on the fact that the player has operated the operation button 120 three times, the effect control CPU 101 stops the rotation of the rotary drum corresponding to the operation in the order of left and right. In this case, when it is determined in advance that it is a probable big hit, if the player operates the operation button 120 at the timing when the stop symbols of the left middle right rotating drum are aligned with the same symbol, the effect control CPU 101 Stop rotation with the middle right rotating drum aligned with the same probability variation. That is, the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied, and the left, middle, and right rotating drums are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same probability change design, and it is notified that they have been promoted to probability change. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 may change the speed at which the rotating drum rotates according to the operation difficulty level. For example, the production control CPU 101 may increase the speed at which the rotating drum rotates when the set operation difficulty level is high, and decrease the speed at which the rotating drum rotates when the set operation difficulty level is low. Further, the production control CPU 101 detects the maximum number of symbols drawn (from detecting the ON signal of the operation button 120) until the rotation of the rotating drum is stopped after detecting the ON signal of the operation button 120 according to the operation difficulty level. It is possible to change the maximum number of symbols after which the final stop is made). For example, when the set operation difficulty level is high, the effect control CPU 101 sets the number of symbols drawn to 0 (finally stops the change of the symbol at the timing when the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected), and sets the operation difficulty level. When the degree is low, the number of symbols drawn may be 4 at the maximum (after the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected, the symbol is changed by a maximum of 4 symbols and finally stopped). Then, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied based on the timing at which the operation button 120 is operated and the maximum number of pull-ins set as the operation difficulty level, and according to the determination result. The rotating drum may be stopped. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 85 to be described later, when “7” is stopped at the position “6” of the middle reel shown in FIG. 85 (3), when the number of pull-in is 0, “7” at the position “6”. However, when the number of pull-in is 4, if the operation button 120 is operated when the symbol “7” is above the position “6” within the range of 4 symbols, “6” “7” may stop at the position. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine includes one operation button 120 has been described. However, the gaming machine may include three operation buttons corresponding to the rotating drum (for example, in FIG. 85, The case where three push buttons are provided corresponding to each decorative pattern is shown).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 may select and execute any one of the effect modes of the probability variation promotion effect described above. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect display device 9 to display the meter on the effect display device 9 based on the value of the effect mode determination random number, and changes the decorative pattern on the left middle right using the effect display device 9. The effect to be performed or the effect to be performed by rotating the left, middle, and right rotating drums may be selected, and the probability variation promotion effect may be executed according to the selected effect mode.

  In this embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined whether or not the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied based on the ON signal from the operation button 120 that outputs one type of ON signal when pressed. The machine may include, for example, a button (a loose cross key) that outputs four types of on signals depending on which part of the top, bottom, left, and right is pressed. In this case, for example, when it is detected that the upper, lower, left and right portions of the cross key are pressed in a predetermined order within a predetermined time (for example, within 3 seconds), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied. May be.

  71 and 72 are flowcharts showing the round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (step S1971). When the big prize opening opening flag is not set (N in step S1971), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1972), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the apparatus 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1973). For example, the effect display device 9 displays the jackpot display symbol and the effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1974), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1975). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1976).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1971), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the number of rounds indicated by the received big prize opening open command is fifteen ( Step S1977). If the number of rounds is not 15, the process proceeds to step S1992. If the number of rounds is 15, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable display result is the second normal big hit or the third certainty big hit (step S1978). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the variable display result is the second normal big hit or the third probability big hit based on the display result command stored in the display result command storage area or the data indicating the display result command. It is determined whether or not there is. If the variable display result is neither the second normal big hit or the third probability variation big hit, the process proceeds to step S1992.

  If the variable display result is the second normal big hit or the third certainty big hit, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first variation start flag is set (step S1979). If the first variation start flag is set, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation condition satisfaction flag is set (step S1980). If the operation condition satisfaction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1982 as it is. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 changes the predetermined condition satisfaction number to 5 times (step S1981).

  The operation condition satisfaction flag is set in step S1980 when the player has successfully operated the operation button 120 in the probability variation promotion effect that was executed last time and established the probability variation notification execution condition. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), the probability variation promotion effect is executed by using the default 10 times as the predetermined condition satisfaction number. In addition, the operation condition establishment flag is not set in step S1980 when the player fails to operate the operation button 120 in the previously executed probability variation promotion effect and the probability variation notification execution condition cannot be established. is there. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), the predetermined condition satisfaction count is changed to 5 to set the operation difficulty level low, and the probability variation promotion effect is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the first positive variation promotion effect executed during the big hit game (round 15 in this embodiment) that is shifted based on the variable display result of the first special symbol being the big hit. Is selected (step S1982), and a first certain change promotion effect execution flag indicating that the first certain change promotion effect is executed is set (step S1983).

  If the first variation start flag is not set in step S1979 (that is, if the second variation start flag is set), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation condition satisfaction flag is set. (Step S1984). If the operation condition satisfaction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1986. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 changes the predetermined operation success period to 1.5 seconds (step S1985).

  The operation condition establishment flag is set in step S1984 when the player succeeds in operating the operation button 120 in the previously executed probability variation promotion effect and establishes the probability variation notification execution condition. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the probable promotion effect is executed using 1.0 seconds from the start of the round effect, which is the default as the predetermined operation success period, from 13 seconds to 14 seconds. It will be. In addition, the operation condition establishment flag is not set in step S1984 when the player fails to operate the operation button 120 in the previously executed probability variation promotion effect and the probability variation notification execution condition cannot be established. Or when it was the second normal big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the predetermined operation success period is changed to 1.5 seconds from 13 seconds to 14.5 seconds after the start of the production during the round, thereby reducing the operation difficulty level. The probability change promotion effect will be executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the second certainty variable promotion effect executed during the jackpot game (round 15 in this embodiment) that is shifted based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. Is selected (step S1986), and a second certainty-variable promotion effect execution flag indicating that the second certainty-changing promotion effect is executed is set (step S1987).

  As described above, when the processing of steps S1979 to S1987 is executed, the first probable change promotion effect (probable change) during the big hit game shifted based on the variable display result of the first special symbol being the big hit. In order to satisfy the notification execution condition, the operation button 120 is repeatedly struck), and the second positive variation promotion effect is performed during the jackpot game that is shifted based on the variable display result of the second special symbol being the jackpot. (An effect of operating the operation button 120 at a predetermined timing in order to establish the probability change notification execution condition) is executed. Therefore, when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state, and when the variable display result of the second special symbol is the big hit, the big hit gaming state is set. Depending on the case of the transition, the probable promotion effect is executed in a different effect mode.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S1988), and if it is set, the operation condition establishment flag is reset (step S1989). That is, if the operation condition establishment flag is set in the previously executed probability variation promotion effect, the operation condition establishment flag is reset before the current probability variation promotion effect is started. Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the production period measurement timer (step S1990) and starts the process timer (step S1991).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an effect during the round based on the number of rounds indicated by the command for opening a special winning opening (step S1992). The effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect during the round (step S1993) and starts a process timer (step S1994). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1995).

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S1977 and S1978 is executed, so that the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the mid-round effect corresponding to the round 15 in the big hit game, but the probability variation promotion effect is shown. The execution timing is not limited to the case shown in this embodiment. For example, the probability variation promotion effect may be executed in an effect during the round other than round 15, or may be executed in an interval effect between rounds. Further, the probability variation promotion effect may be executed in the ending effect after the big hit, or the probability variation promotion effect may be executed during the variation of the decoration symbol after the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped with the non-probability variation symbol. Further, the probability variation promotion effect may be executed a plurality of times on condition that the probability variation notification execution condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the effect period measurement timer by 1 (step S971) and confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , Speakers 27L, 27R, etc.) are controlled (step S974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  When the production period measurement timer times out (Y in step S972), the production control CPU 101 determines a predetermined flag (for example, the first certain change promotion production execution flag or the second certain change) excluding the operation condition establishment flag and the unspecified display flag. The promotion effect execution flag) is reset (step S978), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S979).

  Next, a specific example of the effect operation by displaying various effect images centering on the variable display of the decorative symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 will be described. In the effect control board 80, in response to receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 31, the effect display is performed based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas provided in the display area of the apparatus 9, the decorative symbol variation is started.

  First, of the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, a specific example where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 82.

  FIG. 75 shows that the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the specific effect is not executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 75 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 75 is designated when a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 75 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When a non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern is designated, FIG. 75 (D1) ˜ When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “expansion chance” as shown in FIGS. 75 (F1) to (F6). This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 75 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 75B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, “6” is set as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. In response to the determination of the decorative symbol indicating the number “”, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 75B is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 28A, if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach”, as shown in FIG. Since the effect pattern is always determined to be only the slip TP1-1 and the specific effect of “slip” is executed in the “right” decorative symbol display area to rapidly change the decorative symbol, the “left” decorative symbol is executed. The decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the display area is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance eye” is executed, the combination of decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. In response to the determination as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 75 (B) is performed. When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, a decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, and the symbol 30 (A) based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 3) is referred to, and the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is determined as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. Corresponding to the above, stop display of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 75 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 75 (C1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (C2), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area, it is a fixed ornament that is a non-reach combination. The symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the final decorative symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B is referred to for the final decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area and the “middle” decorative symbol display area, By referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 24, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are determined.

  On the other hand, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 75 (D1), a decoration indicating the number “7” in the “right” decorative symbol display area After the symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbols display area as shown in FIG. 75 (D2). As a result, the decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo consecutive chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, temporary stop display such as decorative symbol fluctuation display may be performed, and then the decorative symbols may be changed again in all the decorative symbol display areas as shown in FIG. 75 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 (D4) to (D6), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 75 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed (temporary) in the “right” decorative symbol display area. After the stop display), as shown in FIG. 75 (E2), the decorative symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” decorative symbol display area. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area. Here, as shown in FIG. 75 (E1), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area is, for example, based on the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2, as shown in FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (E4), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area, the fixed ornament that becomes a non-reach combination is displayed. The symbol is stopped (final stop).

  When the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed, as an example, the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped in the decorative symbol display area “right” as shown in FIG. 75 (F1). After the display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 75 (F2), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is also stopped (temporary stop display) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area. As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development chance HC6 are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 75 (F4), the decorative design is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the player is expected to develop that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 75 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development of the reach state occurs. In this example, the development that reaches the reach state does not occur, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (F5), after the effect display is performed so that the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols in the rotation state is restored. The confirmed decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 76 shows an example of a display operation when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the “Intro” specific effect as shown in FIG. 76 is executed. In FIG. 76 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the variable symbol display, the decorative symbol changes in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area, and the “right” decorative symbol display area is displayed. The decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the character image CH1 is displayed at the display position corresponding to the “medium” decorative symbol display area. Note that the character image CH1 only needs to appear as an effect image in a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state later.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), for example, after the effect display is performed to update the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas. As shown in 76 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area, the update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is changed to the “right” decorative symbol display area. Then, an update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is performed. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), after the effect display that further updates the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas is performed, for example, FIG. As shown in (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area, the updated display of the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is displayed, and in the “right” decorative symbol display area. Update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” is performed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), an effect display that updates the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas as the character image CH1 changes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (H) to (K), in the “left” decorative symbol display area, the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily displayed while the “right” In the decorative symbol display area “”, decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (L), an effect display that updates the decorative symbol is performed, and then “3” as shown in FIG. 76 (M). A decorative pattern indicating a number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 76 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 77 shows a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. For example, the variation pattern designation command is used to change the variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. When any one of them is designated, a specific effect of “Intro” as shown in FIG. 77 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 77, the same effect display as in FIGS. 76A to 76L is performed in the portions of FIGS. 77A to 77L. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (M), the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a reach combination, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  78 to 80 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 78 (A), for example, in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area.

  When a specific effect of “slip” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as an example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (C1) to (C3), “ After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas, changing the decorative symbols again in the “right” decorative symbol display area, An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state becomes the reach state. Further, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA4-4, as shown in FIGS. 78 (D1) to (D5), as an example, After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas, an effect display is performed in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas. After that, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas, so that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. Become. Further, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (E1) to (E6). In all the decorative symbol display areas, after the combination of decorative symbols that will become the development chance HC6 is stopped (temporary stop display), the effect display that the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped are rotated in the reverse direction. Is performed, the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIGS. 78 (C3) and 78 (D5), for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the variation speed of the decorative symbols in the “medium” decorative symbol display area is increased. descend. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, a number indicating “6” in the “medium” decorative symbol display area as shown in FIG. A “normal” reach effect is performed in which the display is stopped (temporarily stopped) along with the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), after displaying the effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area with “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach loss by stopping display of decorative symbols other than the number “6” in the “decorative” display area of “medium”, such as stopping display of the decorative symbol of the number “5” in the decorative symbol display area. What is necessary is just to stop-display the fixed decorative pattern which comprises a combination and complete | finish the variable display of a decorative pattern. When one of reach production α1 to reach production α3 or reach production β1 to reach production β3 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern rises again, and various reach effects are displayed. For example, in the reach effect β1, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 79 (D) is displayed. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 79 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 79 (F) proceeds. To do. In the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), a decorative design that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (G), the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination and to end the variable display of decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 79 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. On the other hand, in reach effect β2 and reach effect β3, after a character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 79 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 79 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 80B, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed, and the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to finish the variable display of a decoration design. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80B to 80D, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a final decorative pattern (final stop display).

  In the case where the probability variation promotion effect (the promotion effect during variation) is executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol that becomes the non-probable variable symbol is temporarily displayed as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), the variation may be changed again in a state where the same decorative symbols are arranged in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Then, when the fluctuating promotion effect is executed and the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied, for example, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the confirmed decoration that becomes a probability change symbol after the decoration symbol that has been temporarily stopped is changed again. A change promotion success effect is performed in which the symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case where the promotion promotion failure during change that notifies that the promotion to the probability change has failed in the promotion promotion during the change is performed, after performing the change of the decorative design as shown in FIG. For example, as in FIG. 80 (F), a definite decorative symbol that becomes a non-probable variable symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 81 shows a display operation example in the case where the notice effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. The decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the display area start changing in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas as shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, according to the effect display control data read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 determined corresponding to the decided notice pattern of the notice YP3-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (C). As described above, the effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is displayed. When the player operates the operation button 120 within a predetermined period, and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 120 to the effect control board 80 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 101 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 showing the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 120 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is erased as shown in FIG. 81 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), variable display of decorative symbols proceeds such as temporarily stopping display of decorative symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area.

  FIG. 82 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 82 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (B) to 82 (D), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as a big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), an effect image informing the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. As an ending effect in response to the end of the two-round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 82 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 82, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started. Even when the variable display result is “small hit”, the effect is executed according to the display mode similar to the effect at the time of “probable” shown in FIG. Further, for example, not only in the case of the sudden change large hit or small hit change display, for example, when the next change display is performed when the promotion to the probability change is not notified in the probability change promotion effect, FIG. You may make it perform the effect of a LIVE mode in the aspect shown to (E)-(G).

  Next, an effect aspect of the probability change promotion effect executed in the effect display device 9 will be described. 83 and 84 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display examples of the probability variation promotion effect executed in the effect display device. Among these, FIG. 83 shows a display example of the production mode of the first certainty-variable promotion effect performed during the jackpot game that is shifted based on the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. FIG. 84 shows a display example of the production mode of the second probability variation promotion effect performed during the jackpot game that is shifted based on the variable display result of the second special symbol being a jackpot. 83 and 84, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3). 83 and 84 is executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100. 83 and 84, a case where the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the effect during round 15 of the big hit game will be described as an example.

  In addition, the execution timing of the probable change promotion effect is not limited to the case shown in this embodiment. For example, the probable change promotion effect may be executed in an in-round effect other than round 15, or an interval effect between rounds. You may make it perform in. Further, the probability variation promotion effect may be executed in the ending effect after the big hit, or the probability variation promotion effect may be executed during the variation of the decoration symbol after the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped with the non-probability variation symbol. Further, the probability variation promotion effect may be executed a plurality of times on condition that the probability variation notification execution condition is not satisfied.

  First, using FIG. 83, a description will be given of the effect mode of the first certain variation promotion effect performed during the jackpot game that is shifted based on the fact that the variable display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. As a precondition, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines that a big hit is made in the big hit determination (see step S1513), and the third positive change with a positive change promotion effect as a big hit type. Assume that the jackpot is determined (see step S1516).

  The production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) determines that the number of rounds is 15 based on the command for opening the big prize opening (see Y in step S1977), and the variable display result is the first. If it is determined that it is a three-probability big hit (see step S1978), based on the first variation start flag being set (see Y in step S1979), the first probable change promotion effect is selected and executed (step S1982). , S1983).

  When executing the first certain change promotion effect, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (1), the execution of the in-round effect corresponding to the round 15 is started. For example, in the effect display device 9, a character string indicating 15 as the number of rounds is displayed, or an effect of displaying a predetermined character is performed.

  Next, when the probability variation promotion effect start time has elapsed (see Y in step S1921), as shown in FIG. 83 (2), the effect display device 9 starts the first probability variation promotion effect. For example, a meter is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, and a character string such as “If you want to be promoted to certain change, press the button repeatedly!” Is displayed as a character line. The player operates the operation button 120 according to the display on the effect display device 9 (continuous hitting). Then, the value of the operation counter is added according to the operation of the operation button 120 (see step S1926), and the meter level gradually increases according to the value of the operation counter as shown in FIG. 83 (3). Such a display is performed (see step S1923).

  When the player has successfully operated the operation button 120 more than the predetermined number of established conditions during the first certain change promotion effect and the operation condition established flag is set, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 83 (4). In addition, the effect display device 9 performs display such that the meter level reaches the maximum. On the other hand, if the player fails to operate the operation button 120 more than the predetermined number of times that the condition is satisfied and the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set, as shown in the diagram on the right side of FIG. In the device 9, a display is made as if the meter level did not reach the maximum. Even if the player has successfully operated the operation button 120 more than the predetermined number of times that the condition is satisfied and the operation condition satisfaction flag is set, if the variable display result is the second normal jackpot, 83 (4) may be displayed in a manner similar to the diagram on the right side of 83 (4) as if the meter level did not reach the maximum on the effect display device 9.

  Next, when the probable promotion promotion end time has elapsed (see Y in step S1924), the presentation control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the operation condition establishment flag is set (see step S1929). If the operation condition flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit (see step S1930). Then, if the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 83 (5), the effect display device 9 is displayed in a superimposed manner to the effect (see step S1931). For example, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Promoted to probable!” As a character line on the effect display device 9 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation condition flag is not set or when the variable display result is the second normal big hit, as shown in the diagram on the right side of FIG. Is displayed in a superimposed manner (see step S1932). For example, an effect of displaying a character string such as “sorry!

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a description will be given of the effect mode of the second probability variation promotion effect performed during the jackpot game that is shifted based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. As a precondition, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines that a big hit is made in the big hit determination (see step S1513), and the third positive change with a positive change promotion effect as a big hit type. Assume that the jackpot is determined (see step S1516).

  The production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) determines that the number of rounds is 15 based on the command for opening the special prize opening (see Y in step S1977), and the variable display result is the first. If it is determined that the third probability variation big hit (see step S1978), based on the fact that the second variation start flag is set (see N in step S1979), the second probability variation promotion effect is selected and executed (step S1986). , S1987).

  When executing the second probability variation promotion effect, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (1), the execution of the in-round effect corresponding to the round 15 is started. For example, in the effect display device 9, a character string indicating 15 as the number of rounds is displayed, or an effect of displaying a predetermined character is performed.

  Next, when the probability variation promotion effect start time has elapsed (see Y in step S1941), the effect display device 9 starts the second probability variation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 84 (2). For example, a meter is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, and a character string such as “Press a button with MAX if you want to be promoted to probability!” Is displayed as a character line. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (3), display is performed such that the meter level gradually increases with time based on the value of the effect period measurement timer (see step S1943). And a player operates the operation button 120 aiming at the timing when the level of the meter displayed on the effect display device 9 becomes the maximum.

  When the player has successfully operated the operation button 120 within the predetermined operation success period during the second probability change promotion effect and the operation condition satisfaction flag is set, the left side of FIG. 84 (4) shows. As described above, the effect display device 9 performs a display as if the meter had stopped at the maximum level. On the other hand, when the player fails to operate the operation button 120 within the predetermined operation success period and the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set, as shown in the diagram on the right side of FIG. In the display device 9, a display is made as if the meter stopped at a point other than the maximum point. The right side of FIG. 84 (4) shows a display example when the operation button 120 is operated in a period before the predetermined operation success period, but from the predetermined operation success period. In the case where the operation button 120 is operated in a later period, for example, a display that the meter level has returned to the minimum point may be performed.

  Moreover, you may perform the effect that the level of a meter reaches the maximum in multiple times during one time of 2nd probability change promotion effect. In this case, for example, if the operation of the operation button 120 is not successful at the timing when the meter level reaches the maximum for the first time, the display once shows that the meter level has returned to the minimum point and then again. If the operation of the operation button 120 is successful at the timing when the level of the meter reaches the maximum again, a display that stops when the level of the meter reaches the maximum is performed. Also good. For example, when performing an effect such that the meter level reaches the maximum three times during one second probability change promotion effect, for example, 10 seconds from the start of the effect during the round to 15 seconds after the start of the effect. When performing the probable promotion effect in a second, an effect that the meter level reaches the maximum in 3.3 seconds may be repeated three times. Further, an effect that reaches the maximum level of the meter is not limited to being performed twice or three times during one second probability variation promotion effect, but may be performed any number of times such as four times or five times.

  Even if the player successfully operates the operation button 120 within the predetermined operation success period and the operation condition establishment flag is set, if the variable display result is the second normal jackpot, In the same manner as the diagram on the right side of FIG. 84 (4), it is only necessary to perform display such that the effect display device 9 stops at a point other than the point where the meter level is maximum.

  Next, when the probable promotion promotion end time has elapsed (see Y in step S1944), the presentation control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the operation condition establishment flag is set (see step S1949). If the operation condition flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit (see step S1950). Then, if the variable display result is the third probability variation big hit, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 84 (5), the effect display device 9 is displayed in a superimposed manner to the effect (see step S1951). For example, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Promoted to probable!” As a character line on the effect display device 9 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation condition flag is not set or when the variable display result is the second normal big hit, as shown in the diagram on the right side of FIG. Is displayed in a superimposed manner (see step S1952). For example, an effect of displaying a character string such as “sorry!

  Note that, in the probable promotion effect, the left and right decorative symbols are changed using the effect display device 9, and the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed based on the detection of the ON signal from the operation button 120. A probable promotion effect may be performed by executing the effect. In addition, for example, when the gaming machine includes three middle left and right rotating drums (rotary reels) that are rotationally driven by a drum motor, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the left middle right in the probability variation promotion effect. Probability promotion effect may be performed by rotating the rotating drum.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a probability variation promotion effect performed by rotating the left middle right rotating drum when the gaming machine includes three left middle right rotating drums (rotating reels). In addition, in FIG. 85, although the case where a probability change promotion effect is performed using a rotating drum is demonstrated, it is the same also when a probability change promotion effect is performed by changing the symbol of the left middle right using the effect display apparatus 9. FIG. . In addition, when performing a probable change promotion effect using a rotating drum, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effect display device 9 to perform variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable symbol variable display. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the predetermined production by rotating the rotating drum only when executing the probability variation promotion production.

  In FIG. 85, the display state transitions in numerical order such as (1) (2) (3). Also, the display effect as illustrated in FIG. 85 is executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. 85 illustrates an example in which the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the mid-round effect of round 15 of the big hit game. In the example shown in FIG. 85, as a precondition, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines that it is a big hit in the big hit determination (see step S1513). Assume that the third probability variation jackpot with the probability variation promotion effect is determined (see step S1516).

  In the example shown in FIG. 85, the gaming machine 1 has a left design pushbutton for stopping the rotation of the left rotary drum, a middle design pushbutton for stopping the rotation of the central rotary drum, It is assumed that three operation buttons, a right design push button for stopping the rotation of the right rotating drum, are provided. Note that the gaming machine 1 may include only one operation button, and may be controlled to stop the rotation of the rotating drum in the order of, for example, left and right as the operation buttons are pressed three times in order.

  When executing the probable promotion effect, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (1), when the probable promotion effect start time has elapsed in the in-round effect corresponding to round 15 (see Y in step S1921), the left middle right The rotation of the rotating drum (variable display) is started, and the probable promotion effect is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (2), when the player presses the left symbol push button, the rotation of the left rotating drum is stopped. Also, as shown in FIG. 85 (3), when the player next presses the right design push button, the rotation of the right rotating drum is stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (4), when the player presses the middle symbol push button, the rotation of the inner rotating drum is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (4), when all the left, middle and right rotating drums are stopped, it is determined whether or not the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, when the right and left middle symbol push buttons are pressed at a predetermined timing, it is determined that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied, and the stop symbol shown on the left middle right rotating drum is laterally or obliquely displayed. Stopped with the same pattern in the direction. In the example shown in FIG. 85 (4), the stop symbols shown on the left, middle and right rotating drums are stopped in a state where the same symbols are aligned, and it is determined that the probability change notification execution condition is satisfied. Such a state in which the stop symbols shown on the left, middle, and right rotating drums are aligned with the same symbol corresponds to a display indicating that the stop symbol has been promoted to a certain probability.

  On the other hand, for example, when the right and left middle symbol push buttons are not pressed at a predetermined timing, it is determined that the probability change notification execution condition is not satisfied, and the stop symbol shown on the left middle right rotating drum is in the horizontal direction and It is stopped in a state where the same pattern is not aligned in any of the diagonal directions. A state where the stop symbols shown on the left, middle and right rotating drums are not aligned with the same symbol corresponds to an indication that the promotion to probability change has failed.

  If at least one of the left and right design push buttons is not operated by the player, for example, when the probability change promotion effect end time has elapsed, for example, the stop design shown on the left middle right rotating drum Are stopped in a state where they are not arranged in the same pattern, and the probable promotion effect is ended.

  Next, the execution timing of the probability change promotion effect by the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect. Among these, FIG. 86 (A) shows a case where the player has been successful in operating the operation button 120 in the previous probability variation promotion effect and is notified that the player will be promoted to probability variation. FIG. 86 (B) shows a case where the player has been informed of the failure to promote to probability change because the player has failed to operate the operation button 120 in the previous probability change promotion effect.

  Also, in FIG. 86, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, an example is given in which a first positive variation promotion effect is executed in a jackpot game that has been shifted based on the variable display result of the first special symbol being a jackpot. explain. The same applies to the case where the second certain variation promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game that has been shifted based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. The same applies to the case where the second probability change promotion effect is executed after the first probability change promotion effect is executed last time. Conversely, the first probability change promotion effect is executed after the second probability change promotion effect is executed last time. The same applies to the case.

  First, a case will be described in which the player has been successful in operating the operation button 120 in the previous probability variation promotion effect and is notified that the player will be promoted to probability variation. For example, it is assumed that the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the third probability variable jackpot is determined as the variable display result of the first special symbol. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) executes the first certain change promotion effect in the effect during the round corresponding to the round 15, as shown in FIG. Steps S1977 to S1983, S1903, S1920 to S1933).

  When the player succeeds in repeatedly hitting the operation button 120 a predetermined number of times (for example, default 10 times) in the first probability change promotion effect (see Y in step S1927), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the probability change. It is determined that the notification execution condition is satisfied, and the operation condition satisfaction flag is set (see step S1928). Then, it is informed that promotion to probability change is made (see step S1931). In the case of executing the second probability change promotion effect, if the player has successfully operated the operation button 120 for a predetermined operation success period (for example, the default of 1.0 second), the operation condition establishment flag is set. (See steps S1947 and S1948).

  Next, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first variation start command and the variation pattern command, and executes the variation display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation display (big variation variation display) of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 86 (A), the effect display device 9 displays the red background color based on the received high-probability state background designation command, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (steps S1625 and S1627). reference). 86 (A) shows a case where the jackpot variation display is performed as the variation display of the first special symbol, but the first special symbol is not notified after being promoted to the certain variation by the certain variation promotion effect. Similarly, in the case of performing the variation display of the deviation as the variation display, the effect display device 9 displays the red background color on the effect display device 9 based on the received high-probability state background designation command, and the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed.

  Next, when the first probability variation promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the operation condition establishment flag is set in the previous first probability variation promotion effect. The first certain change promotion effect is executed without changing the predetermined number of conditions to be maintained at the default of 10 (see Y in step S1980). When the second probability change promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, based on the fact that the operation condition establishment flag is set, the predetermined operation success period remains unchanged for 1.0 second ( In step S1984, see Y), and the second probability variation promotion effect is executed.

  Then, if the player succeeds in repeatedly hitting the operation button 120 for a predetermined number of times (for example, the default 10 times), it is notified that the player will be promoted to a certain probability (see step S1931), and the predetermined number of times for the predetermined condition is satisfied. If it fails, it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed (see step S1932).

  Next, a case will be described in which the player has failed to operate the operation button 120 in the previous probability change promotion effect and is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed. For example, it is assumed that the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the third probability variable jackpot is determined as the variable display result of the first special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the first certain change promotion effect in the effect during round corresponding to round 15 (see steps S1977 to S1983, S1903, S1920 to S1933). ).

  In the first probability variation promotion effect, if the player fails to repeatedly hit the operation button 120 a predetermined number of times (for example, the default 10 times) (see N in step S1927), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the probability variation. It is determined that the notification execution condition is not satisfied, and the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set. Then, it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed (see step S1932), and an unspecified display flag is set (see step S1933). In the case of executing the second probability change promotion effect, if the player fails to operate the operation button 120 for a predetermined operation success period (for example, the default 1.0 second), the operation condition establishment flag is set. Instead (see step S1947), it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed, and an unspecified display flag is set (see steps S1952 and S1953).

  Next, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first variation start command and the variation pattern command and executes the variation display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol (the variation display of the big hit). 86B, although the high probability state background designation command is received, a green background color is displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the fact that the unspecified display flag is set. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see steps S1626 and S1629). By doing so, when displaying the change after the notification that the promotion to the probability change has failed, the display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner in which it is not possible to specify whether or not the state is the probability change state. . 86 (B) shows a case where a jackpot variation display is performed as a variation display of the first special symbol, but the first special symbol is not notified after being promoted to a certain variation in the certain variation promotion effect. Similarly, when the variation display of the deviation is performed as the variation display, the green display color is displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the fact that the unspecified display flag is set, and the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed.

  Next, when the first probability variation promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), based on the fact that the operation condition establishment flag is not set in the previous first probability variation promotion effect. Then, the predetermined condition satisfaction number is changed to 5 times so that the operation difficulty level is lowered (see N in step S1980, S1981), and the first certain change promotion effect is executed. When the second probability change promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, the predetermined operation success period is changed to 1.5 seconds based on the fact that the operation condition establishment flag is not set. (Refer to N in step S1984, S1985), and the second probability change promotion effect is executed.

  Then, if the player succeeds in repeatedly hitting the operation button 120 a predetermined condition number of times (for example, five times after the change), it is notified that the player will be promoted to a certain probability (see step S1931), and the predetermined condition number of times is repeatedly hit. If it fails, it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed (see step S1932).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), (1) the probability variation promotion effect is not executed on the basis of the fact that the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display. When the effect using the red background color is executed when executing the variation display of the decorative design, (2) after the non-probable variable design is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design, When it is informed that it will be promoted to a probable change and, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), when an effect using a red background color is executed when executing the variation display of the next decorative design, (3) the decorative design After the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display, the probability variation promotion effect is executed to notify that the promotion to the probability variation has failed, and as shown in FIG. When performing with a green background color when performing (4) Based on the fact that the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the next decorative symbol variation display is performed without executing the probability variation promotion effect. There are four effects when an effect using a green background color is executed when executing. When the non-probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed without executing the probability variation promotion effect of (4), the background color (for example, blue) in the normal state is used when the next decorative symbol variation display is performed. You may make it perform the production which was.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the probable big hit, all the above-described effects (1) to (4) may be performed. For example, when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit is determined and the probability variation symbol is determined as the final stop symbol using the third final stop symbol determination table 163C in the decorative symbol variation start process. (Refer to step S836) and the effect mode (1) is performed. Further, for example, when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit is determined, the non-probable variation symbol is determined as the final stop symbol using the third final stop symbol determination table 163C in the decorative symbol variation start process. In that case (see step S836), the effect mode (4) is performed. Further, for example, in the case where it is determined that the third probability variation big hit, the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the final stop symbol using the second final stop symbol determination table 163B in the decorative symbol variation start process (see step S835). At the same time, when the player succeeds in operating the operation button 120 in the probability variation promotion effect, the effect mode (2) described above is performed. Further, for example, in the case where it is determined that the third probability variation jackpot, the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the final stop symbol using the second final stop symbol determination table 163B in the decorative symbol variation start process (see step S835). At the same time, when the player fails to operate the operation button 120 in the probable promotion effect, the effect mode (3) is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a normal big hit, the effect mode (3) or (4) may be performed. For example, when the first normal jackpot is determined and the probability variation symbol is determined as the final stop symbol using the first final stop symbol determination table 163A in the decorative symbol variation start process (see step S834). The effect mode (4) is performed. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the second normal big hit, and the non-probable variation symbol is determined as the final stop symbol using the first final stop symbol determination table 163A in the decorative symbol variation start processing (step) (Refer to S834), regardless of the success or failure of the operation of the operation button 120 in the probability change promotion effect, the effect mode (3) described above is performed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to be the third probability variation big hit and that the operation with the operation button 120 has been successfully performed during the execution of the probability variation promotion effect. Inform the condition that it will be promoted to probability. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the operation difficulty level to be low based on the operation status of whether or not the operation button 120 has been successfully operated. Therefore, the game effect can be executed according to the player's characteristics, and the player's interest in the notification effect (probability promotion effect) that the probability change state occurs can be improved. In addition, the player can recognize that the operation button 120 has been promoted due to the successful operation of the operation button 120, and the interest in the operation by the operation button 120 can be further improved.

  For example, even a player with a low operation skill who cannot hit the operation button 120 repeatedly or press it at a predetermined timing cannot succeed in the operation with the operation button 120 every time. (Probability change notification execution condition) cannot be satisfied, and the situation where the promotion to probability change is not notified can be prevented. Therefore, the interest with respect to the operation by the operation button 120 can be further improved.

  In this embodiment, as the predetermined notification condition (probability change notification execution condition), the number of consecutive hits of the operation button 120 (number of predetermined conditions) and the operation timing of the operation button 120 (predetermined successful operation period) are set. However, the present invention is not limited to these conditions. For example, a predetermined notification condition may be satisfied based on the player operating the operation button 120 once.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the predetermined condition establishment number of times is changed as the operation difficulty level or the predetermined operation success period is changed according to the operation state of the player is not limited thereto. For example, in the case where the pressing effect using the rotating drum is performed as the probable change promotion effect, the speed at which the rotating drum rotates may be changed or the number of symbols drawn may be changed according to the operation situation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the operation difficulty level is changed based on the operation state of the operation button 120 at the time of the last probable promotion effect is shown as the operation state of the player. When performing a notice effect or a reach effect accompanying a player's operation, the operation difficulty level may be changed based on the operation state of the operation button 120 in the notice effect or the reach effect. For example, when a notice effect or a reach effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of times the detection signal is input from the operation button 120 in the notification effect or the reach effect during the decorative symbol variation display. You may make it count using a predetermined | prescribed counter. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control may change the operation difficulty level so as to be easier if the count value of the counter is less than a predetermined number when the probability change promotion effect is executed next during the big hit game. Conversely, if the count value of the counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the operation difficulty level may be changed to be difficult. Moreover, you may make it change an operation difficulty level based on the operation condition of the operation button 120 at the time of other probability change promotion effects performed not only the last time the probability change promotion effect, but several times before.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are provided that variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be distinguished from each other and derive and display the display results. For this reason, by allowing variable display of a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to provide more playability.

  In this embodiment, the case where the operation difficulty level is changed to be low when the operation of the operation button 120 fails is shown. However, the operation difficulty level is increased when the operation button 120 is successfully operated. You may make it change as follows. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the post-round processing (step S806) in the case where the operation difficulty level is changed to be higher when the operation button is successfully operated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 87, the processes in steps S1971 to S1980 are the same as those shown in FIG. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set in step S1980, the process proceeds to step S1982 as it is. That is, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), when the operation of the operation button 120 has failed in the previous probability change promotion effect, the predetermined condition satisfaction number is kept at the default of 10 times and is not changed. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is set (Y in step S1980), the production control CPU 101 changes the predetermined condition satisfaction number to 15 (step S1981A). That is, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), when the operation button 120 is successfully operated in the previous certainty promotion promotion effect, the predetermined condition satisfaction number is changed to 15 times, and the operation difficulty level is increased. To do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 87, the processes in steps S1982 to S1984 are the same as those shown in FIG. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set in step S1984, the process proceeds to step S1986 as it is. That is, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), when the operation of the operation button 120 has failed in the previous certainty promotion promotion effect, the predetermined operation success period is kept at the default of 1.0 second and is not changed. If the operation condition satisfaction flag is set, the production control CPU 101 changes the predetermined operation success period to 0.5 seconds (step S1985A). That is, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), when the operation button 120 is successfully operated in the previous probability change promotion effect, the predetermined operation success period is changed to 0.5 seconds to increase the operation difficulty level. Change to

  The processes after step S1986 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 71 and 72.

  FIG. 89 is a timing diagram showing the execution timing of the probability change promotion effect when the operation difficulty level is changed to be higher when the operation button is successfully operated. Among these, FIG. 89 (A) shows a case where the player has been successful in operating the operation button 120 in the previous probability variation promotion effect and is notified that the player will be promoted to probability variation. FIG. 89B shows a case where the player has failed to operate the operation button 120 in the previous probability variation promotion effect and is notified that the promotion to probability variation has failed.

  Also, in FIG. 89, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, an example is given in which the first positive variation promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game that has been shifted based on the variable display result of the first special symbol being a jackpot. explain. The same applies to the case where the second certain variation promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game that has been shifted based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. The same applies to the case where the second probability change promotion effect is executed after the first probability change promotion effect is executed last time. Conversely, the first probability change promotion effect is executed after the second probability change promotion effect is executed last time. The same applies to the case.

  First, a case will be described in which the player has been successful in operating the operation button 120 in the previous probability variation promotion effect and is notified that the player will be promoted to probability variation. For example, it is assumed that the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the third probability variable jackpot is determined as the variable display result of the first special symbol. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) executes the first certain change promotion effect in the effect during the round corresponding to the round 15, as shown in FIG. Steps S1977 to S1983, S1903, S1920 to S1933).

  When the player succeeds in repeatedly hitting the operation button 120 a predetermined number of times (for example, default 10 times) in the first probability change promotion effect (see Y in step S1927), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the probability change. It is determined that the notification execution condition is satisfied, and the operation condition satisfaction flag is set (see step S1928). Then, it is informed that promotion to probability change is made (see step S1931). In the case of executing the second probability change promotion effect, if the player has successfully operated the operation button 120 for a predetermined operation success period (for example, the default of 1.0 second), the operation condition establishment flag is set. (See steps S1947 and S1948).

  Next, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first variation start command and the variation pattern command and executes the variation display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol (the variation display of the big hit). As shown in FIG. 89 (A), the effect display device 9 displays a red background color based on the received high-probability state background designation command and displays a variation of the decorative pattern (steps S1625 and S1627). reference). Note that FIG. 89 (A) shows a case where a variation display of jackpot is performed as a variation display of the first special symbol, but the first special symbol is not notified after being promoted to a certain variation in the certain variation promotion effect. Similarly, in the case of performing the variation display of the deviation as the variation display, the effect display device 9 displays the red background color on the effect display device 9 based on the received high-probability state background designation command, and the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed.

  Next, when the first probability variation promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), based on the fact that the operation condition establishment flag is set in the previous first probability variation promotion effect. Then, the predetermined condition satisfaction number is changed to 15 times so as to increase the operation difficulty level (see Y in step S1980, S1981A), and the first certain change promotion effect is executed. When the second probability variation promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, the operation difficulty level is changed by changing the predetermined operation success period to 0.5 seconds based on the operation condition establishment flag being set. Is increased (see Y in step S1984, S1985A), and the second probability variation promotion effect is executed.

  Then, if the player succeeds in repeatedly hitting the operation button 120 a predetermined condition number of times (for example, five times after the change), it is notified that the player will be promoted to a certain probability (see step S1931), and the predetermined condition number of times is repeatedly hit. If it fails, it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed (see step S1932).

  Next, a case will be described in which the player has failed to operate the operation button 120 in the previous probability change promotion effect and is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed. For example, it is assumed that the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the third probability variable jackpot is determined as the variable display result of the first special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the first certain change promotion effect in the effect during round corresponding to round 15 (see steps S1977 to S1983, S1903, S1920 to S1933). ).

  In the first probability variation promotion effect, if the player fails to repeatedly hit the operation button 120 a predetermined number of times (for example, the default 10 times) (see N in step S1927), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the probability variation. It is determined that the notification execution condition is not satisfied, and the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set. Then, it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed (see step S1932), and an unspecified display flag is set (see step S1933). In the case of executing the second probability change promotion effect, if the player fails to operate the operation button 120 for a predetermined operation success period (for example, the default 1.0 second), the operation condition establishment flag is set. Instead (see step S1947), it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed, and an unspecified display flag is set (see steps S1952 and S1953).

  Next, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first variation start command and the variation pattern command and executes the variation display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol (the variation display of the big hit). 89B, although the high probability state background designation command is received, a green background color is displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the fact that the unspecified display flag is set. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see steps S1626 and S1629). By doing so, when displaying the change after the notification that the promotion to the probability change has failed, the display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner in which it is not possible to specify whether or not the state is the probability change state. . Note that FIG. 89 (B) shows a case where the jackpot variation display is performed as the variation display of the first special symbol, but the first special symbol is not notified after the probability variation promotion effect is not informed. Similarly, when the variation display of the deviation is performed as the variation display, the green display color is displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the fact that the unspecified display flag is set, and the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed.

  Next, when the first probability variation promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 89B, based on the fact that the operation condition establishment flag is not set in the previous first probability variation promotion effect. The first certain change promotion effect is executed without changing the predetermined number of conditions to be maintained at the default of 10 (see N in step S1980). When the second probability change promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, based on the fact that the operation condition establishment flag is not set, the predetermined operation success period remains unchanged for 1.0 second ( In step S1984, refer to N), and the second probability variation promotion effect is executed.

  Then, if the player succeeds in repeatedly hitting the operation button 120 for a predetermined number of times (for example, the default 10 times), it is notified that the player will be promoted to a certain probability (see step S1931), and the predetermined number of times for the predetermined condition is satisfied. If it fails, it is notified that the promotion to probability change has failed (see step S1932).

  As described above, even when configured as shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, a game effect can be executed in accordance with the player's characteristics, and a notification effect (probability change promotion) that a probability change state occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to (production).

  For example, it is possible to increase the degree of satisfaction with a game by tightening conditions for establishing a predetermined notification condition (probability change notification execution condition) for a player with a high operation skill of the operation button 120. Therefore, the interest with respect to the operation by the operation button 120 can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the third probability variation jackpot, in the probability variation promotion effect, it is not notified that the promotion to probability variation is based on the failure to operate the operation button 120. In some cases, after the big hit gaming state is finished, an effect that cannot be recognized as the probability variation state is executed (for example, the background is displayed with a green background color and the decorative symbol variation display is executed). Therefore, regardless of the operation using the operation button 120 by the player, it is possible to prevent a situation where it is grasped that the probable big hit is internally determined after the big hit gaming state is ended. It is possible to prevent the willingness to use the operation buttons 120 and the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the display result on the first special symbol display 8a or displays the display result on the second special symbol display 8b. When the first reserved memory number is 1 or more and the second reserved memory number is 1 or more (specifically, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory in steps S1503 and S1504 of the special symbol normal process) When both the numbers are determined to be 1) and the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is displayed as the second special symbol display. This is executed in preference to the variable display of the second special symbol in the device 8b, and when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the second special symbol variable display in the second special symbol display unit 8b. Run in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 8a. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the invalidation of the start winning prize.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the display result derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a is a big hit, and displays the second special symbol display 8b. The probability variation promotion effect is executed in a different effect mode when it is determined that the display result that is derived and displayed is a big hit. Therefore, variations can be given to the production mode of the probable promotion effect, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  For example, it is possible to prevent the production mode of the probable promotion effect from being the same and monotonous every time, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in this embodiment, the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 is easier to win in the probability variation state and the short time state as compared with the first starting winning opening 13. When the state is a certain change state or a short time state, the frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the ratio of the types of effect modes of the probability variation promotion effect can be varied, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the total number of reserved memories when the total number of reserved memories corresponding to the sum of the first number of reserved memories and the second number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. The variable display time is shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a shortening variation is performed in one of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the other In the special symbol display, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shortening variation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and reduce the situation where the start winning is invalidated. Therefore, the operating rate of variable display can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect in the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 9 when it is determined to be out of place. Further, the technique control microcomputer 560 has a small total reserved memory number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number when the total reserved memory number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is large. It is determined that the reach effect is executed at a small rate compared to the time. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is large, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the reach effect during the decorative symbol variation display. Therefore, in the gaming machine provided with the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the operation rate of variable display can be improved and the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. be able to. Moreover, the situation where starting winning becomes invalid can be reduced by improving the operating rate of variable display.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the identification information is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach the reach state using the reach determination random number MR2-2. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. Also, a variation pattern of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined from among the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type, using a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach state is determined or not, the variation pattern type can be determined using the common variation pattern type determination random number MR3, and the variation pattern can be determined. The data capacity (data capacity of the work area for determining the variation pattern) can be reduced. Further, according to this embodiment, after selecting the variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined by the common processing routine using the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and the variation pattern determination table is selected. After that, the variation pattern is determined by a common processing routine using the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. Therefore, by sharing the processing routine, the program for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern can be compressed, and the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at different selection ratios when it is determined that the probability big hit is determined and when it is determined that the normal big hit. Therefore, the degree of expectation for shifting to the probable change state for the player can be varied depending on the display result of the decorative symbol derived and displayed on the effect display device 9. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by the type of the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the effect display device 9.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that it is a big hit, it determines whether or not to make a probable big win and whether or not the promising promotion effect can be executed. This is determined before the display result is derived and displayed using the random number MR2-1. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect pattern that executes the probability variation promotion effect and an effect pattern that does not execute the probability change promotion effect, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect. In addition, since it is determined using the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination whether or not the probability variation jackpot is made and whether or not the probability variation promotion effect can be executed, the success or failure of the probability variation jackpot and the probability variation promotion effect are executed. It is possible to prevent an increase in the control burden for determining whether or not it is possible.

  Also, according to this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 decides to make a big hit, it changes the variation pattern type according to the decision result using the random value MR2-1 for big hit type determination. A distribution table having a different distribution is selected, and the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types using the selected distribution table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the possibility of promotion to probability change according to the determined variation pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest with respect to effects during variable display.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in response to the determination that the reach state is made by the determination process using the reach determination random number MR2-2, the random value MR3 for the variation pattern type determination is determined. Is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the determination process using the reach determination random number value MR2-2, the special symbol variable display using the variation pattern type determination random number MR3 is performed. Any one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type for executing a specific effect (effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-run”, “intro”, “development opportunity”) in the effect display device 9 To decide. For this reason, even when it is determined to be out of date and it is determined not to reach the reach state, a specific effect can be executed during the variable display. Therefore, even when it is not a big hit and when it does not reach the reach mode, various effects can be executed during the variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of whether or not the reach state has been determined, the variation pattern type is determined using the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, so the capacity of the program for determining the variation pattern is reduced. Can be reduced.

  For example, as a conventional gaming machine, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-160763 discloses a reach based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 by using the values of two variation type counters such as the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. There is described a gaming machine configured to determine a type and the like, and to determine a more detailed symbol variation mode based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-160763, the values of two fluctuation type counters are used to determine the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit or the occurrence of reach. If not, the symbol variation type is determined using only the first variation type counter CS1 without using the second variation type counter CS2. For this reason, the number of symbol variation types determined when neither big hit nor reach is reduced, and it is not possible to improve the game entertainment taste when neither big hit nor reach.

  In addition, since the variation pattern is determined using only one random number when it is neither big hit nor reach, the probability that each variation pattern is selected tends to be the same, and the selection ratio of each variation pattern has randomness. Without bias. Also, if the selection ratio of each variation pattern is intentionally random, the method of assigning the determination value to the random value becomes complicated, and the complexity in designing the appearance frequency of each variation pattern increases.

  In this embodiment, even if it is neither big hit nor reach, there is a case where the fluctuation pattern including a specific effect is determined using two random numbers, so the symbol fluctuation type in the case where neither big hit nor reach is increased And can improve the interest of the game. Further, after the variation pattern type is assigned using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is finally determined using the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. (That is, since the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process), the selection ratio of each variation pattern can be easily randomized, and the selection ratio of each variation pattern is not biased. be able to.

  For example, when a variation pattern is determined using only one random number, when distribution of each variation pattern is to be changed, distribution of random number values for all variation patterns must be changed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to change the distribution of random values for each variation pattern within the distributed variation pattern type, so the appearance frequency of each variation pattern can be easily changed in design.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. When the variable display of symbols is stopped, a common decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the number of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is provided only on the effect control board 80 among the boards for controlling each effect device (effect display device 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c). However, the microcomputer may be mounted on a plurality of substrates that control each rendering device.

  For example, the gaming machine 1 includes a sound / lamp control board that controls the speakers 27L and 27R, the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c, and a symbol control board that controls the effect display device 9, and the sound / lamp control board has a sound / lamp control board. A lamp control microcomputer may be mounted, and the symbol control microcomputer may be mounted on the symbol control board. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 first transmits a change start command, a change pattern command, and a display result command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer, and the design from the sound / lamp control microcomputer. These commands may be transferred (or transmitted after processing) to the control microcomputer. Then, the symbol control microcomputer may display the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 based on the command transferred (or received) from the sound / lamp control microcomputer. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 first transmits a decorative symbol stop designation command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer, and the decorative symbol is transmitted from the sound / lamp control microcomputer to the symbol control microcomputer. The stop designation command may be transferred (or transmitted after processing). The symbol control microcomputer stops the variation display of the ornament symbol on the effect display device 9 based on the ornament symbol stop designation command transferred (or received) from the sound / lamp control microcomputer. A stop symbol may be derived and displayed. In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer determines the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice effect, the stop pattern of the decoration design, etc., and adds these determination contents to the command and transfers them to the design control microcomputer. You may make it do. The symbol control microcomputer may execute a notice effect based on a command transferred (or received) from the sound / lamp control microcomputer, or may derive and display a decorative symbol stop symbol.

  The game control microcomputer 560 first transmits a command such as a change start command, a change pattern command, a display result command, and a decorative symbol stop designation command to the symbol control microcomputer. These commands may be transferred (or sent after processing) to the sound / lamp control microcomputer. The sound / lamp control microcomputer may control the speakers 27L and 27R and the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c based on a command transferred (or received) from the symbol control microcomputer.

  Further, for example, the gaming machine 1 may include a sound control board that controls the speakers 27L and 27R, and a lamp / design control board that controls the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c and the effect display device 9. . Further, the gaming machine may include a sound / design control board for controlling the speakers 27L, 27R and the effect display device 9, and a lamp control board for controlling the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c.

  In this embodiment, the process of determining the big hit (see steps S1508 to S1517) and the like is performed by the common routine when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and when the second special symbol is displayed as a variable symbol. In the start port switch passing process (see step S312), a start winning confirmation process for the first start winning opening 13 and a start winning confirmation process for the second start winning opening 14 are performed. Also, a common routine may be used. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process when the common routine is implemented. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the second start winning a prize opening switch 14a is on (step S211A). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the start port pointer (step S211B). If the second start port switch 14a is not turned on (that is, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on), data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer (step S211B).

  Data indicating the address of the first reserved memory number counter or the address of the second reserved memory number counter is set in the start port pointer. That is, the data indicating “first” set in the start port pointer indicates the address of the first reserved memory number counter, and the data indicating “second” indicates the address of the second reserved memory number counter. The start port pointer is formed in the RAM 55. A first reserved memory number counter and a second reserved memory number counter are also formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. Instead of the start pointer, data indicating “first” or “second” may be set in a register inside the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4 (step S212A). If the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4, the process ends.

  If the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 (step S213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicated by the start port pointer is set in the area (step S214A).

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area in the holding storage buffer indicated by the start port pointer. Processing is executed (step S215A).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start port winning designation command indicated by the start port pointer (step S216A). Further, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number, which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating the total reserved memory number based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S218).

  Note that both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a may be turned on at the same timing. Therefore, when data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer in step S211B based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is in the on state in step S211A, the processing in steps S212A to S218 is executed. Later, it may be confirmed whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state. If the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, step S211C may be executed to set data indicating “first” in the start port pointer, and the processing after step S212A may be executed.

  Further, when the start port switch passing process is made a common routine, a common reserved memory number buffer similar to that shown in FIG. 46 may be used. In this case, after incrementing the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S213A, the CPU 56 replaces the processing in step S214A with the reserved memory specifying information storage area at the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicated by the start port pointer is executed. Further, the CPU 56 replaces the processing in step S215A with each random value (random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, random value MR2-2 for determining the reach, fluctuation A random number value MR3 for pattern type determination and a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted, and a process of storing them in the random number value storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed.

  Further, when the start port switch passing process is made a common routine, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination according to the same process as the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. After that (see step S331), the variation pattern is determined based on the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination (see step S333).

  Even when the start port switch passing process is made into a common routine, not all random values are extracted when a start winning occurs, but fluctuations such as a random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination and a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. The random value for determining the pattern may be extracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing of variation pattern determination (see steps S331 and S333)).

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the operation difficulty level in the probability variation promotion effect to be executed next based on whether or not it has been notified that the operation using the operation button 120 was successful and promoted to the probability variation in the previous probability variation promotion effect. However, the determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect itself may be changed. Hereinafter, based on whether or not the operation using the operation button 120 was successful and the promotion to the probability change was notified in the previous probability change promotion effect, the determination ratio of whether to execute the probability change promotion effect itself is changed. The second embodiment will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, the final stop symbol determination table in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a final stop symbol determination table according to the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 is a table for determining a definite decorative symbol to be one of the big hit combinations or the odd chance items TC1 to TC4, for example, as shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to (C). The final stop symbol determination tables 163D, 163E, and 163F shown are included.

  The normal final stop symbol determination table 163E shown in FIG. 91A is displayed as a non-probable variable symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas when a normal big hit is made. This table is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The normal final stop symbol determination table 163E has an even symbol pattern in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. It consists of data for determination assigned to the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”.

  In addition, the probability change final stop symbol determination table 163F shown in FIG. 91 (B) stops in the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as probability variation symbols when probability variation is a big hit. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163F at the time of probability change has the odd number symbols for which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. It consists of decision data assigned to the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (B), in this embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit, the probability variation is always used as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, except when the probability variation promotion effect is executed. It differs from the first embodiment in that a design is used.

  Note that the sudden probability change final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 91C is the same as the sudden probability change final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 27D of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S801) in the second embodiment. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the processes in steps S820 to S831 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  In step S832A, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit type is “second normal big hit” or “third reliable variable big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. When the jackpot type is “second normal jackpot” or “third probability variation jackpot”, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the probability change promotion effect for determining whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect. (Step S833A). And it is confirmed whether the operation condition satisfaction flag is set (step S833B).

  If the operation condition satisfaction flag is set (Y in step S833B), the effect control CPU 101 uses the probability change promotion effect determination table for determining whether to execute the probability change promotion effect or not when the operation is successful. A determination table is selected (step S833C). If the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set (N in step S833B), the effect control CPU 101 uses the probability change promotion effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect. A promotion effect determination table is selected (step S833C). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect using the extracted probability change promotion effect determination random number and the selected probability change promotion effect determination table (step S833E).

  FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a probability variation promotion effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect. Among these, FIG. 94 (A) shows a table for determining the probable change promotion effect upon successful operation. FIG. 94 (B) shows a table for determining the probable change promotion effect upon operation failure. In step S833E, when the operation condition satisfaction flag is set (that is, when the operation button 120 is successfully operated in the previous probability variation promotion effect and notification that the promotion is promoted to probability variation), FIG. ) Is determined to be executed with a high probability (with an probability of 80% in the example shown in FIG. 94A). In addition, when the operation condition satisfaction flag is not set (that is, when the operation of the operation button 120 has failed in the previous probability variation promotion effect and the notification of promotion to probability variation has not been made), FIG. 94 (B ), It is determined that the probability variation promotion effect is executed with a low probability (in the example illustrated in FIG. 94B, with a probability of 40%).

  When it is decided to execute the probability change promotion effect (Y in step S833F), the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability change promotion effect execution flag indicating that the probability change promotion effect is to be executed (step S833G). A non-probable variation symbol is determined as a combination of a definite decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol by using the normal final stop symbol determination table 163E shown in 91 (A) (step S833H).

  When it is not determined to execute the probable promotion effect (N in step S833F), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the jackpot type is “second normal jackpot” when the variable display result is “jackpot”. It is determined whether or not (step S833I). When the big hit type is “second normal big hit”, the effect control CPU 101 uses the normal final stop symbol determination table 163E shown in FIG. A non-probable variable symbol is determined (step S833J). When the big hit type is not the “second normal big hit” (that is, when it is “the third positive probability big hit”), the production control CPU 101 uses the positive change final stop symbol determination table 163F shown in FIG. 91 (B). Then, a probable variation symbol is determined as a combination of the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (step S833K).

  As described above, when the variable display result is determined to be the second normal big hit or the third probability variation big hit by executing the processes of steps S832A to S833K, the operation button 120 is displayed in the previous probability variation promotion effect. When it is notified that the operation is successful and promoted to probability change, it is decided to execute the probability change promotion effect with a high probability, and the operation of the operation button 120 fails in the previous probability change promotion effect and promotes to probability change. When the effect is not notified, control is performed so as to determine to execute the probable promotion effect with a low probability.

  When the big hit type is neither “second normal big hit” nor “third probability variable big hit” (N in step S832A), the effect control CPU 101 has a big hit among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not the type is “first normal big hit” (step S834A). When the jackpot type is “first normal jackpot”, the effect control CPU 101 uses the normal final stop symbol determination table 163E shown in FIG. 91 (A) as a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols. A non-probable variable symbol is determined (step S835A). When the big hit type is not “first normal big hit” (that is, “first positive probability big hit” or “second positive probability big hit”), the effect control CPU 101 performs final change at probability change shown in FIG. 91 (B). Using the stop symbol determination table 163F, a probability variation symbol is determined as a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (step S836A).

  In addition, about the process of step S837-S843, it is the same as that of those processes shown in 1st Embodiment.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (step S806) according to the second embodiment. In the post-round processing, the processing in steps S1971 to S1978 is the same as those processing described in the first embodiment.

  If the variable display result is the second normal jackpot or the third probability variation jackpot (Y in step S1978), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability variation promotion effect execution flag is set (step S1978A). If the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability change promotion effect execution flag (step S1978B), and checks whether the first variation start flag is set (step S1979). ).

  If the first variation start flag is set (Y in step S1979), the process proceeds to step S1982, and process data corresponding to the first certain change promotion effect is selected (step S1982). Note that the processes in steps S1982 and S1983 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  If the first variation start flag is not set in step S1979 (N in step S1979, that is, if the second variation start flag is set), the production control CPU 101 performs a process corresponding to the second certain variation promotion production. Data is selected (step S1986). Note that the processing after step S1986 in the round post-processing is the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to be the third probability variation big hit, the probability variation big hit is obtained by deriving and displaying the probability variation symbol on the effect display device 9. It is determined whether to notify the presence, or to derive and display the non-probable variation symbol on the effect display device 9 to execute the probability variation promotion effect. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the probability variation promotion effect when it is determined to execute the probability variation promotion effect in the third probability variation big hit. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 informs that the probability change is a big hit by deriving and displaying the probability variation symbol on the effect display device 9 based on the operation state of whether or not the operation of the operation button 120 is successful. Alternatively, the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect by deriving and displaying the non-probability variation symbol on the effect display device 9 is changed. Therefore, the game effect can be executed according to the player's characteristics, and the player's interest in the notification effect (probability promotion effect) that the probability change state occurs can be improved.

  For example, a predetermined notification condition (probability change notification execution condition) can be satisfied for a player who cannot hit the operation button 120 continuously or a player who cannot press the operation button 120 at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the promotion to probability change is not notified. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player who feels the operation of the operation button 120 from being reluctantly requested to operate the operation button 120. Therefore, the interest with respect to the operation by the operation button 120 can be further improved.

  The present invention includes a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and derives and displays a display result, which is advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit. A special game in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is easily changed to the specific display result as compared with the normal game state after the specific game state is ended and the specific game state is satisfied when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The present invention can be suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a state and executes a transition condition establishment notification effect capable of notifying that a predetermined transition condition has been established.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach generation probability at the time of determining not to make it a big hit and a small hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area) and a pending | holding buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the common pending | holding memory number buffer with which a 1st pending memory number and a 2nd pending memory number are provided in common. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the number of times of large winning a prize opening | release opening. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a non-reach symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a reach design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of condition satisfaction frequency | count and operation success period. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect performed by rotating a rotating drum. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of a probability change promotion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a post-round process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a setting of conditions satisfaction count, and the operation success period. It is a timing diagram which shows the other example of the execution timing of a probability change promotion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port switch passage process at the time of making into a common routine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the final stop symbol determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for probability change promotion effect determination. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-process in 2nd Embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
120 Operation buttons 503 Random number circuit

Claims (1)

A specific game state having a variable display unit for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and deriving and displaying the display result, and advantageous for the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit And when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is more likely to be the specific display result compared to the normal state after the specific game state ends. A transition machine that performs transition condition establishment notification effect capable of notifying that the predetermined transition condition is established,
As an effect part, an image display device that executes variable display of multiple types of effect identification information in response to variable display of identification information in the variable display unit,
And whether said variable display unit derived display said particular display result display results that are in a pre-determining means for determining the derivation display the previous display results the predetermined and whether to establish a shift condition,
A notification effect executing means capable of executing the transition condition establishment notification effect based on the determination by the prior determination means as the specific display result;
An operation means operable by a player,
The notification effect execution means is determined to establish the predetermined transition condition, and is provided on the condition that the predetermined notification condition is satisfied based on an operation by the operation means during the execution of the transition condition satisfaction notification effect. , Informing that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
When it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a special display result that can identify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied among the variable display results of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result Deriving and displaying on the image display device informs that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, or displays the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result other than the special display result in the image display device A notification method determining means for determining whether to execute the transition condition establishment notification effect by deriving and displaying
The notification effect execution means executes the transition condition establishment notification effect when the notification method determination means determines to execute the transition condition establishment notification effect,
The notification method determining means derives and displays the special display result on the image display device as a variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result based on an operation state of the operation means. The transition condition is notified or the variable display result of the effect identification information corresponding to the specific display result other than the special display result is derived and displayed on the image display device, and the transition condition establishment notification effect is achieved. A game machine characterized by changing a decision rate of whether or not to execute.

Images